1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or
3364 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3369 style only that one time.
3370 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3372 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3390 manual for information on how to use it.
3393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3397 \begin_layout Standard
3398 Each class has a default set of options.
3399 Here's a quick table describing them:
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3403 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3409 \begin_layout Standard
3411 \begin_inset Tabular
3412 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3413 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3414 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3415 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3417 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3879 \begin_layout Standard
3880 You're probably also wondering what
3881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3885 \begin_inset space ~
3889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3893 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3894 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3899 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3904 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3914 headings, there are also
3922 headings, and so on.
3923 We will describe these headings fully in section
3924 \begin_inset space ~
3928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3930 reference "subsec:Headings"
3937 \begin_layout Subsection
3939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3941 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3946 \begin_inset Index idx
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 \begin_inset Index idx
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 \begin_layout Standard
3969 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3986 \begin_inset space ~
3991 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3993 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3994 doesn't support special options you want to
3995 use for your document.
3996 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3997 -class and its options, you have to read
4001 \begin_layout Standard
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4018 \begin_inset space ~
4023 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4024 You can choose between the following five options:
4027 \begin_layout Labeling
4028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 Use default page style of current class.
4036 \begin_layout Labeling
4037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4042 No page numbers or headings.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 \begin_layout Labeling
4055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4060 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4061 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4062 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4063 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4066 \begin_layout Labeling
4067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4072 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4073 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4079 \begin_inset Index idx
4082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4090 How they are defined is explained in section
4091 \begin_inset space ~
4095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4097 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4104 \begin_layout Standard
4105 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4106 \begin_inset space ~
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4112 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4119 \begin_layout Subsection
4120 Paper Size and Orientation
4121 \begin_inset Index idx
4124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4125 Document ! Paper size
4131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4133 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4140 \begin_layout Standard
4141 You can find the following options in the menu
4144 \begin_inset space ~
4151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4155 \begin_inset Index idx
4158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4167 \begin_layout Labeling
4168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4172 \begin_inset space ~
4177 What size paper to print on.
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4209 US letter, US legal, US executive
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Itemize
4225 \begin_layout Labeling
4226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4231 To choose whether to output as
4242 \begin_layout Labeling
4243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4247 \begin_inset space ~
4252 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4253 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4260 name "subsec:Margins"
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_inset Index idx
4278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4287 \begin_layout Standard
4288 Paper margins are set in the menu
4290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4294 \begin_inset Index idx
4297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 \begin_layout Standard
4307 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4308 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4309 the paper format and the font size into account.
4312 \begin_layout Subsection
4316 \begin_layout Standard
4317 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4323 That includes the paragraph environments.
4324 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4325 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4326 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4328 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4337 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4339 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4340 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4341 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4344 \begin_layout Section
4345 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4346 \begin_inset Index idx
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 Paragraph ! Indentation
4358 \begin_layout Subsection
4360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4362 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4371 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4376 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4377 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4378 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4382 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4388 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4389 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4390 language than English.
4392 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4396 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4397 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4398 into \SpecialChar LyX
4400 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4403 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4405 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4406 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4407 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4415 goes to produce a printable file.
4420 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4422 gives you the ability globally to change
4426 these pre-coded spacings.
4427 We will explain more later.
4430 \begin_layout Subsection
4431 Paragraph Separation
4432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4434 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4439 \begin_inset Index idx
4442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4443 Paragraph ! Separation
4451 \begin_layout Standard
4459 \begin_inset space ~
4467 \begin_inset space ~
4474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4478 \begin_inset Index idx
4481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4487 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4490 \begin_layout Subsection
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4505 dialog and toggle the
4508 \begin_inset space ~
4513 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4516 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4520 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4521 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4527 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4530 \begin_layout Subsection
4532 \begin_inset Index idx
4535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4536 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4551 \begin_inset Index idx
4554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4563 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4567 \begin_inset space ~
4576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4577 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4583 \begin_inset Index idx
4586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 installed to use this feature.
4598 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4600 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4602 \begin_inset space ~
4607 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4608 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4611 \begin_layout Section
4612 Paragraph Environments
4613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4615 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4620 \begin_inset Index idx
4623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4624 Paragraph ! Environments
4630 \begin_inset Index idx
4633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4634 Paragraph environments|(
4642 \begin_layout Subsection
4646 \begin_layout Standard
4647 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4650 \begin_layout Standard
4659 } \SpecialChar ldots
4669 \begin_inset Newline newline
4672 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4674 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4675 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4676 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4685 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4689 A paragraph environment is simply a
4690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4697 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4698 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4699 scheme, labels, and so on.
4700 Additionally, you can
4701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4708 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4709 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4710 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4711 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4713 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4715 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4719 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4720 \begin_inset Graphics
4721 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4727 at the left end of the toolbar.
4729 will change the environment of the
4733 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4734 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4735 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4739 \begin_layout Standard
4748 create a new paragraph using the
4752 paragraph environment.
4754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4761 because if you are in one of these environments:
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Itemize
4806 \begin_layout Standard
4808 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4812 , rather than resetting it to
4817 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4818 \begin_inset space ~
4822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4824 reference "sec:Nesting"
4831 \begin_layout Subsection
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 The default paragraph environment is
4841 It creates a plain paragraph.
4843 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4844 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4845 this manual) are in the
4852 \begin_layout Standard
4853 You can nest a paragraph using the
4857 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4865 \begin_layout Subsection
4867 \begin_inset Index idx
4870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4879 \begin_layout Standard
4880 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4881 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4890 for thanks or contact information.
4891 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4892 places all of this on a separate page
4893 along with today's date.
4894 For other types of documents, the title
4895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4902 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4906 \begin_layout Standard
4908 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4922 Here's how you use them:
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 Put the title of your document in the
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 Put the author name in the
4941 \begin_layout Itemize
4942 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4943 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4949 Note that using this environment is optional.
4950 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4951 will automatically insert today's date.
4952 If you don't want a date, use the option
4954 Suppress default date on front page
4958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4959 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4961 \begin_inset space ~
4969 \begin_layout Standard
4970 You can use footnotes to insert
4971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4978 or contact information.
4981 \begin_layout Subsection
4983 \begin_inset Index idx
4986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4995 name "subsec:Headings"
5002 \begin_layout Standard
5003 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5005 takes care of the numbering for you.
5008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5010 \begin_inset Index idx
5013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5014 Section headings ! Numbered
5022 \begin_layout Standard
5023 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Enumerate
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5071 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5072 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5073 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5076 \begin_layout Standard
5077 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5078 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5079 You group the book into chapters.
5081 does a similar grouping:
5084 \begin_layout Itemize
5089 is divided into either
5100 \begin_layout Itemize
5112 \begin_layout Itemize
5124 \begin_layout Itemize
5136 \begin_layout Itemize
5148 \begin_layout Itemize
5160 \begin_layout Standard
5161 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5169 Not all document types use the
5173 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5178 is the top-level heading.
5186 \begin_layout Standard
5191 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5192 labels it with its number,
5193 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5195 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5209 \begin_inset Index idx
5212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5213 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5221 \begin_layout Standard
5222 The unnumbered section headings have a
5223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5230 at the end of their name.
5231 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5232 the table of contents, see section
5233 \begin_inset space ~
5237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5247 Changing the Numbering
5248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5250 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5258 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5259 in the Table of Contents.
5260 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5262 Just as certain classes start with
5276 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5286 This is something you can change.
5289 \begin_layout Standard
5292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5296 \begin_inset Index idx
5299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5308 \begin_inset space ~
5312 \begin_inset space ~
5317 you will see two counters.
5322 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5323 numbers a section heading.
5324 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5329 Short Titles of Headings
5330 \begin_inset Index idx
5333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5334 Section headings ! Short titles
5340 \begin_inset Argument 1
5343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5352 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5360 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5361 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5362 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5363 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5366 \begin_layout Standard
5368 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5369 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5370 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5371 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5376 \begin_inset space ~
5382 This will insert a box labeled
5383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5387 \begin_inset space ~
5391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5394 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5395 This also works for captions inside floats.
5396 There can only be one short title per title.
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5407 \begin_layout Standard
5408 The following information applies to all section headings:
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5420 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5423 \begin_layout Itemize
5424 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5427 \begin_layout Subsection
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5433 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5447 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5448 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5449 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5450 the text they contain.
5451 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5459 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5462 \begin_layout Standard
5463 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5472 when you start a new paragraph.
5473 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5477 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5478 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5479 have to change back to the
5483 environment yourself.
5486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5495 \begin_inset Index idx
5498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5507 \begin_layout Standard
5508 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5509 time for the differences.
5518 are identical except for one difference:
5522 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5531 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5534 \begin_layout Standard
5535 Here's an example of the
5548 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5550 See – no indentation!
5554 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5555 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5556 the other paragraph.
5559 \begin_layout Standard
5560 Here's another example, this time in the
5567 \begin_layout Quotation
5573 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5574 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5575 the first line, then
5579 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5583 you were quoting other text.
5586 \begin_layout Quotation
5587 Here's a new paragraph.
5588 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5589 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5592 \begin_layout Standard
5593 As the examples show,
5597 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5598 They should put quotes in the
5603 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5607 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5612 \begin_inset Index idx
5615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5622 \begin_inset Index idx
5625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5641 \begin_layout Standard
5646 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5652 \begin_inset Newline newline
5655 Which I did not rehearse!
5659 It could be much worse.
5660 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5662 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5663 indented a bit more than the first.
5664 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5670 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 And make things look fine
5674 \begin_inset Newline newline
5680 arg "newline-insert newline"
5686 \begin_layout Standard
5691 does not indent both margins.
5692 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5693 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5696 arg "newline-insert newline"
5702 \begin_layout Subsection
5704 \begin_inset Index idx
5707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5723 \begin_layout Standard
5725 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5735 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5736 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5745 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5746 lets you provide your own label.
5747 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5748 describing some general features of all four of them.
5751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5755 \begin_layout Standard
5756 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5758 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5759 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5768 reset the environment to
5772 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5773 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5774 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5778 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5782 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5789 \begin_layout Standard
5790 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5791 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5792 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5794 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5795 you read all of section
5796 \begin_inset space ~
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5802 reference "sec:Nesting"
5809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5811 \begin_inset Index idx
5814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5830 \begin_layout Standard
5831 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5835 paragraph environment.
5836 It has the following properties:
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5846 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5849 \begin_layout Itemize
5850 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5854 \begin_layout Itemize
5855 The items can have any length.
5857 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5858 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5865 \begin_layout Itemize
5870 environment inside another
5874 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5878 \begin_layout Itemize
5879 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Itemize
5884 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5887 \begin_layout Itemize
5889 \begin_inset space ~
5893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5895 reference "sec:Nesting"
5899 for a full explanation of nesting.
5903 \begin_layout Standard
5904 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5913 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5916 \begin_layout Standard
5917 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5918 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5921 \begin_layout Itemize
5922 The label for the first level
5926 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5931 The label for the second level is a dash.
5935 \begin_layout Itemize
5936 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5940 \begin_layout Itemize
5941 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5945 \begin_layout Itemize
5946 Back out to the third level.
5950 \begin_layout Itemize
5951 Back to the second level.
5955 \begin_layout Itemize
5956 Back to the outermost level.
5959 \begin_layout Standard
5960 These are the default labels for an
5965 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5970 dialog in the submenu
5975 \begin_inset Index idx
5978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5984 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5988 \begin_layout Standard
5989 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5990 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5992 \begin_inset space ~
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5998 reference "sec:Nesting"
6005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6007 \begin_inset Index idx
6010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6019 name "sec:Enumerate"
6026 \begin_layout Standard
6031 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6032 It has these properties:
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 environment resets the counter to one.
6058 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6073 Items can have any length.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6080 \begin_layout Enumerate
6081 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6084 \begin_layout Enumerate
6085 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6098 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6100 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6101 labels the four different levels in an
6108 \begin_layout Enumerate
6109 The first level of an
6113 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6122 \begin_layout Enumerate
6123 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6127 \begin_layout Enumerate
6128 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6137 \begin_layout Enumerate
6138 Back to the third level
6142 \begin_layout Enumerate
6143 Back to the second level.
6147 \begin_layout Enumerate
6148 Back to the outermost level.
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6156 environment, see section
6157 \begin_inset space ~
6161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6163 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6168 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6173 There is more to nesting
6177 environments than we've stated here.
6178 You should read section
6179 \begin_inset space ~
6183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6185 reference "sec:Nesting"
6189 to learn more about nesting.
6192 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6194 \begin_inset Index idx
6197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6206 \begin_layout Standard
6207 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6211 list has no fixed label.
6212 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6221 of the first line as the label.
6225 \begin_layout Description
6226 Example: This is an example of the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6239 \begin_layout Standard
6241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6248 it is meant that the first usage of the
6252 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6254 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6262 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6282 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6286 for more information.) Here is an example:
6289 \begin_layout Description
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6294 Example: This one shows how to use a
6297 \begin_inset space ~
6309 \begin_layout Description
6310 Usage: You should use the
6314 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6315 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6317 It's not a good idea to use a
6321 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6322 You're better off using
6334 paragraphs into them.
6337 \begin_layout Description
6338 Nesting: You can nest
6342 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6348 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6349 them from the first line.
6352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6354 \begin_inset Index idx
6357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6366 \begin_layout Standard
6371 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6372 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6376 \begin_layout Standard
6385 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6387 Here are its properties:
6390 \begin_layout Labeling
6391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6393 \begin_inset space ~
6396 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6405 of each line as the item label.
6410 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6411 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6412 space as described above.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6417 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6418 uses different margins for the item label and the
6419 body of the item text.
6420 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6421 label width plus a little extra space.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width \SpecialChar LyX
6432 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6433 If the label width is larger, the label
6434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6441 into the first line.
6442 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6443 margin of the rest of the item text.
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6449 \begin_inset space ~
6452 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6457 environment has the same left margin.
6458 \begin_inset Newline newline
6461 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6464 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6466 \begin_inset space ~
6471 dialog (toolbar button
6474 arg "layout-paragraph"
6481 \begin_inset space ~
6486 determines the default label width.
6487 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6496 multiple times instead.
6497 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6507 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6510 \begin_inset space ~
6515 every time you alter a label in a
6520 \begin_inset Newline newline
6523 The predefined default width is the length of
6524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6532 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_layout Standard
6543 list the same way as the
6547 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6553 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6562 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6563 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6565 \begin_inset space ~
6569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6571 reference "sec:Nesting"
6575 to learn about nesting.
6578 \begin_layout Standard
6579 There is yet another feature of the
6583 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6584 left-justifies the item labels by
6586 You can use additional
6590 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6591 justifies the item label.
6596 are documented in section
6597 \begin_inset space ~
6601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6603 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6608 Here are some examples:
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 Left The default for
6620 \begin_layout Labeling
6621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6629 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6632 \begin_layout Labeling
6633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6634 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6645 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6648 \begin_layout Subsection
6650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6652 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6657 \begin_inset Index idx
6660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 \begin_layout Standard
6670 The features described in this section require that the module
6672 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6674 is loaded in the document settings.
6675 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6681 \begin_inset Index idx
6684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6695 Custom Enumerate Lists
6696 \begin_inset Index idx
6699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6708 \begin_layout Standard
6710 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6716 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6717 There you add the command
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6728 \begin_layout Standard
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6741 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6742 Code, look at section
6743 \begin_inset space ~
6747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6749 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6762 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6769 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6770 For capital Roman numerals replace
6782 in the command above.
6783 For Arabic numerals use
6791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6798 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6815 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 You can only number 26
6824 \begin_inset space ~
6827 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6837 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6840 \begin_layout Standard
6841 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6844 \begin_layout Enumerate
6845 \begin_inset Argument 1
6848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6874 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_inset Argument 1
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6901 \begin_layout Enumerate
6906 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_inset Argument 1
6910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Enumerate
6935 \begin_inset Argument 1
6938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6964 \begin_layout Standard
6965 For this list these commands were used:
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6979 \begin_inset Newline newline
6987 \begin_inset Newline newline
6995 \begin_inset Newline newline
7005 \begin_layout Standard
7012 makes the label emphasized and
7021 \begin_layout Standard
7022 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7030 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7031 lists until you change the definition.
7039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7041 \begin_inset Index idx
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7045 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7053 \begin_layout Standard
7054 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7057 \begin_layout Enumerate
7058 \begin_inset Argument 1
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_inset Note Note
7083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7084 goes back to default numbering
7092 \begin_layout Enumerate
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7100 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7105 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7110 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7111 to indicate that it is a resumed
7112 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7113 , but in the output.
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7117 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7134 \begin_layout Standard
7135 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7137 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7138 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7139 of a normal enumeration.
7140 There, insert the command
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7149 \begin_layout Standard
7154 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7158 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7166 \begin_layout Standard
7167 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7170 \begin_layout Enumerate
7171 \begin_inset Argument 1
7174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7190 This enumeration starts at 4
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset Index idx
7198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7208 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7210 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7213 \begin_layout Itemize
7217 \begin_layout Itemize
7218 with standard spacing
7221 \begin_layout Standard
7222 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7224 Add there the command
7228 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7231 \begin_layout Itemize
7232 \begin_inset Argument 1
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 \begin_layout Itemize
7258 \begin_layout Itemize
7262 \begin_layout Standard
7263 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7270 \begin_inset Index idx
7273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7281 For more information see its documentation,
7282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7292 \begin_layout Standard
7293 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7295 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7296 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7300 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7304 \begin_inset Argument 1
7307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7315 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7328 \begin_layout Enumerate
7329 with negative indentation
7332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7333 Further Customization
7334 \begin_inset Index idx
7337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7338 Lists ! Customization
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7347 You can also change the style of description lists.
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7358 changes the description label font, the command
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7368 sets the list style.
7371 \begin_layout Standard
7372 An example where the command
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7380 itshape, style=nextline
7383 \begin_layout Standard
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7393 \begin_inset Argument 1
7396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7402 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7404 itshape, style=nextline
7414 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7415 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7419 \begin_layout Description
7421 \begin_inset space ~
7424 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7425 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7426 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7429 \begin_layout Standard
7430 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7436 \begin_inset Index idx
7439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 For more information see its documentation
7448 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7458 \begin_layout Subsection
7460 \begin_inset Index idx
7463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7474 \begin_inset space ~
7477 Address: An Overview
7480 \begin_layout Standard
7481 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7482 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7490 \begin_inset space ~
7496 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7497 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7498 gags on the document.
7499 In contrast, you can use the
7506 \begin_inset space ~
7511 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7512 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7516 \begin_layout Standard
7517 Of course, you're not limited to using
7524 \begin_inset space ~
7533 \begin_inset space ~
7538 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7539 some European academic papers.
7542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7546 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7553 \begin_layout Standard
7558 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7559 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7568 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7569 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7570 Here's an example of each:
7573 \begin_layout Right Address
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 \begin_inset Newline newline
7583 \begin_inset Newline newline
7586 When is it? What is today?
7589 \begin_layout Standard
7593 \begin_inset space ~
7599 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7601 the largest block of text on a single line.
7602 Here's an example of the
7609 \begin_layout Address
7611 \begin_inset Newline newline
7614 Where do I send this
7615 \begin_inset Newline newline
7618 Your post office and country
7621 \begin_layout Standard
7622 As you can see, both
7629 \begin_inset space ~
7634 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7639 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7640 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7646 This makes sense, since
7654 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7655 Thus, you have to use
7662 arg "newline-insert newline"
7667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7668 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7670 \begin_inset space ~
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7679 ) to start a new line in an
7686 \begin_inset space ~
7694 \begin_layout Subsection
7698 \begin_layout Standard
7699 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7700 or list of references.
7702 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7707 \begin_inset Index idx
7710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7725 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7726 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7727 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7741 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7742 The book document classes ignores the
7746 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7750 in a letter document class.
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7758 environment does several things for you.
7759 First, it puts the centered label
7760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7768 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7770 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7771 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7772 the subsequent text.
7773 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7775 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7784 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7785 The new paragraph will still be in the
7790 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7791 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7794 \begin_layout Standard
7795 \begin_inset Float figure
7800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7802 \begin_inset Graphics
7803 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7816 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7837 \begin_layout Standard
7838 We would love to demonstrate the
7842 environment, but since this document is in the
7843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7850 class, we can't do this.
7851 We inserted it therefore as figure
7852 \begin_inset space ~
7856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7858 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7863 If you have never heard of an
7864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7871 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7876 \begin_inset Index idx
7879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7888 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7900 environment is used to list references.
7901 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7902 only use it at the end of the document.
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 When you first open a
7919 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7920 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7936 depending on the document class.
7937 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7938 Each paragraph of the
7942 environment is a bibliography entry.
7947 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7948 Each new paragraph is still in the
7955 \begin_layout Standard
7956 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7957 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7959 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7961 handling, have a look at section
7962 \begin_inset space ~
7966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7968 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7975 \begin_layout Subsection
7976 Special Environments
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7981 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7982 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7990 \begin_inset Index idx
7993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8003 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8010 \begin_layout Standard
8016 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8018 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8023 key as a fixed whitespace.
8027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8040 \begin_inset space ~
8045 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8063 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8066 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8069 arg "newline-insert newline"
8086 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8087 So, when you finish using the
8092 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8093 Also, you can nest the
8098 environment inside of others.
8101 \begin_layout Standard
8102 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8105 \begin_layout Itemize
8109 arg "newline-insert newline"
8112 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8117 \begin_inset space \space{}
8127 arg "newline-insert newline"
8133 \begin_layout Itemize
8137 arg "newline-insert newline"
8147 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8155 You must put at least one
8159 in any line you want blank.
8160 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8164 \begin_layout Itemize
8165 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8169 since that will insert
8174 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8177 arg "self-insert \""
8183 \begin_layout Standard
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8204 printf("Hello World!
8209 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8213 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8217 \begin_layout Standard
8218 This is just the standard
8219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8230 \begin_layout Standard
8236 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8238 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8239 as if you used a typewriter.
8240 \begin_inset Index idx
8243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8244 Paragraph environments|)
8249 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8252 Program Code Listings
8257 \begin_inset space ~
8265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8269 \begin_inset Index idx
8272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8281 \begin_layout Standard
8286 environment is similar to the
8291 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8292 computer console text.
8297 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8311 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8312 you can have empty lines.
8325 \begin_layout Itemize
8326 have a certain language and a text style
8329 \begin_layout Itemize
8330 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8331 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8332 and \SpecialChar TeX
8336 \begin_layout Standard
8337 Because of these properties
8341 works like a typewriter.
8345 \begin_layout Verbatim
8349 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 The following 2 lines are empty:
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8363 \begin_layout Verbatim
8364 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8369 \begin_layout Standard
8374 environment is identical to
8378 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8379 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8386 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8390 \begin_layout Section
8391 Nesting Environments
8392 \begin_inset Index idx
8395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 Nesting ! Environments
8402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8411 \begin_layout Subsection
8415 \begin_layout Standard
8417 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8419 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8421 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8423 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8435 \begin_layout Enumerate
8439 \begin_layout Enumerate
8444 \begin_layout Enumerate
8448 \begin_layout Enumerate
8453 \begin_layout Enumerate
8457 \begin_layout Standard
8458 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8459 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8461 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8475 \begin_inset space ~
8479 \begin_inset space ~
8484 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8486 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8489 arg "depth-increment"
8495 arg "depth-decrement"
8509 arg "depth-increment"
8515 arg "depth-decrement"
8519 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8520 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8524 \begin_layout Standard
8525 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8526 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8527 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8528 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8529 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8532 \begin_layout Standard
8533 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8535 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8537 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8540 \begin_layout Subsection
8541 What You Can and Can't Nest
8544 \begin_layout Standard
8545 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8546 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8549 \begin_layout Standard
8550 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8551 than a simple yes or no.
8552 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8556 Completely unnestable
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8569 \begin_layout Standard
8570 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8571 environments have them:
8574 \begin_layout Description
8575 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8576 Can't nest into them.
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8586 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8611 \begin_layout Description
8613 \begin_inset space ~
8616 Nestable You can nest them.
8617 You can nest other things into them.
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Description
8684 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8685 You can't nest anything into them.
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_inset space ~
8777 \begin_layout Itemize
8784 \begin_layout Standard
8785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8803 \begin_inset space ~
8806 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8807 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8808 nested section headings violate this.
8816 \begin_layout Subsection
8817 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8818 \begin_inset Index idx
8821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8830 \begin_layout Standard
8831 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8832 affected by nesting anyhow.
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Itemize
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8858 Figures and tables in
8862 are not affected by this.
8867 Have a look at section
8868 \begin_inset space ~
8872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8874 reference "sec:Floats"
8878 for more information about
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8887 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8888 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8893 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8901 of its own, it behaves just like a
8902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8909 paragraph environment.
8910 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8914 \begin_layout Standard
8915 Here's an example with a table:
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8923 \begin_layout Enumerate
8924 This is (a) and it's nested.
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8935 \begin_layout Standard
8937 \begin_inset Tabular
8938 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8939 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9026 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9035 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9039 \begin_layout Enumerate
9043 \begin_layout Standard
9044 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9047 \begin_layout Enumerate
9052 \begin_layout Enumerate
9053 This is (a) and it's nested.
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9058 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9064 \begin_layout Standard
9066 \begin_inset Tabular
9067 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9068 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9069 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9161 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9171 \begin_layout Enumerate
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9180 \begin_layout Standard
9181 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9184 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9192 \begin_layout Enumerate
9193 This is (a) and it's nested.
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9205 \begin_inset Tabular
9206 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9207 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9294 \begin_layout Standard
9295 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9301 \begin_layout Enumerate
9303 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9310 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 \begin_layout Standard
9315 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9321 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9322 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9326 \begin_layout Subsection
9327 Usage and General Features
9330 \begin_layout Standard
9331 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9332 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9341 is the innermost possible depth.
9342 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9345 \begin_layout Enumerate
9346 level #1 – outermost
9350 \begin_layout Enumerate
9355 \begin_layout Enumerate
9360 \begin_layout Enumerate
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9370 \begin_layout Itemize
9379 \begin_layout Standard
9380 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9381 both of them in the example.
9382 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9392 For example, if we tried to nest another
9397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9404 , we would get errors.
9407 \begin_layout Subsection
9409 \begin_inset Index idx
9412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9421 \begin_layout Standard
9422 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9423 We have several examples of nested environments.
9424 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9429 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9432 \begin_layout Labeling
9433 \labelwidthstring MMM
9434 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9443 \begin_layout Labeling
9444 \labelwidthstring MMM
9445 #2-a This is level #2.
9446 We created it by using
9449 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9455 arg "depth-increment"
9462 \begin_layout Labeling
9463 \labelwidthstring MMM
9464 #3-a This is level #3.
9465 This time, we just enter
9472 arg "depth-increment"
9476 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9480 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9486 arg "depth-increment"
9493 \begin_layout Standard
9498 environment, nested inside of
9499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9507 So, it's at level #4.
9508 We did this by entering
9511 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9517 arg "depth-increment"
9520 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9525 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9541 \begin_layout Standard
9546 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9549 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9555 \begin_layout Labeling
9556 \labelwidthstring MMM
9557 #4-a This is level #4.
9561 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9564 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9569 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9573 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9578 keep nesting things inside
9579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9597 \begin_layout Labeling
9598 \labelwidthstring MMM
9599 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9600 and this is level #6.
9601 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9607 #5-b Back to level #5.
9611 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9617 arg "depth-decrement"
9624 \begin_layout Labeling
9625 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9635 arg "depth-decrement"
9638 , we're back at level #4.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #3-b Back to level #3.
9645 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #2-b Back to level #2.
9656 \begin_layout Labeling
9657 \labelwidthstring MMM
9658 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9659 After this sentence, we will enter
9663 and change the paragraph environment back to
9670 \begin_layout Standard
9671 We could have also used the
9687 environment in place of the
9692 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9696 Example 2: Inheritance
9699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9700 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9712 arg "depth-increment"
9716 \begin_inset Newline newline
9719 which, we will change to the
9727 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 environment, at level #2.
9735 \begin_layout Enumerate
9736 Notice how the nested
9740 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9744 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9748 \begin_layout Standard
9749 We ended this example by entering
9754 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9758 and reset the nesting depth by using
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9768 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9777 \begin_inset Argument 1
9780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9781 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9789 \begin_layout Enumerate
9790 This is level #1, in an
9794 paragraph environment.
9795 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9799 \begin_layout Enumerate
9804 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9810 arg "depth-increment"
9814 Now, what happens if we nest an
9818 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9819 label be? An asterisk?
9823 \begin_layout Itemize
9833 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9834 So, its label is a bullet.
9835 (We got here by using
9838 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9844 arg "depth-increment"
9847 , then changing the environment to
9855 \begin_layout Itemize
9856 Here's level #4, produced using
9859 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9865 arg "depth-increment"
9869 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9874 \begin_layout Enumerate
9877 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9882 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9886 , because we are in the
9894 environment (that is, it is an
9909 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9915 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9919 \begin_layout Enumerate
9920 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9926 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9929 \begin_layout Enumerate
9933 arg "depth-decrement"
9936 to decrease the depth after the next
9939 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9956 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9961 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9970 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9975 reset the counter for the label.
9979 \begin_layout Enumerate
9983 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9989 arg "depth-decrement"
9992 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9993 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9994 into the twofold-nested
10002 \begin_layout Enumerate
10003 The same thing happens if we do another
10006 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10012 arg "depth-decrement"
10015 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10018 \begin_layout Standard
10019 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10024 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10035 The number of other
10039 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10046 The same rule applies for the
10050 environment, as well.
10053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10054 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10057 \begin_layout Enumerate
10058 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10059 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10060 the same detail with how we did it.
10069 \begin_layout Standard
10077 arg "depth-increment"
10084 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10085 the example in parentheses someplace.
10086 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10087 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10088 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10092 \begin_layout Enumerate
10097 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10101 \begin_layout Verse
10102 Now we will add verse.
10103 \begin_inset Newline newline
10106 It will get much worse.
10107 \begin_inset Newline newline
10117 arg "depth-increment"
10127 \begin_layout Verse
10128 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10129 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10133 \begin_inset Newline newline
10139 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10147 \begin_layout Verse
10148 Here comes a table:
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10161 \begin_inset Tabular
10162 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10163 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10250 \begin_layout Verse
10254 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10264 arg "depth-increment"
10270 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10276 \begin_inset Newline newline
10284 arg "depth-decrement"
10291 \begin_layout Enumerate
10296 : level #1) This is another item.
10297 Note that selecting a
10301 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10302 3 times to put the table inside the
10310 \begin_layout Quotation
10311 We're now ending the
10315 list and changing to
10320 We're still at level #1.
10321 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10322 The next set of paragraphs is a
10323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10330 We will nest both the
10337 \begin_inset space ~
10342 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10346 for the letter body.
10350 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10353 to preserve the depth.
10354 Remember that you need to use
10357 arg "newline-insert newline"
10360 to create multiple lines inside the
10367 \begin_inset space ~
10377 \begin_layout Right Address
10379 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10383 \begin_inset Newline newline
10389 \begin_layout Address
10391 \begin_inset space ~
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10402 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10403 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10404 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10405 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10406 as soon as possible.
10407 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10412 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10413 with your order, along with payment.
10416 \begin_layout Quotation
10417 We thank you again for your patience.
10420 \begin_layout Address
10422 \begin_inset Newline newline
10429 \begin_layout Quotation
10430 That ends that example!
10433 \begin_layout Standard
10434 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10435 gives you a lot of power with just
10437 We could have easily nested an
10458 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10461 \begin_layout Subsection
10463 \begin_inset Index idx
10466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10467 Nesting ! Separation
10473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10475 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10482 \begin_layout Standard
10483 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10485 For example you need two different enumerations:
10488 \begin_layout Enumerate
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Enumerate
10502 \begin_layout Standard
10503 \begin_inset Separator plain
10509 \begin_layout Itemize
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10516 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Enumerate
10530 \begin_layout Enumerate
10534 \begin_layout Standard
10535 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10536 list item and use the menu
10538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10539 Separated <Name> Above
10543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 Separated <Name> Below
10547 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10548 ) and before or behind it the
10550 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10553 \begin_layout Standard
10554 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10555 (red arrow in LyX).
10556 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10557 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10564 arg "paragraph-break"
10571 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10574 \begin_layout Section
10575 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10576 \begin_inset Index idx
10579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10588 \begin_layout Standard
10589 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10590 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10592 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10593 be broken at the end of a line.
10594 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10598 \begin_layout Subsection
10600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10602 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10607 \begin_inset Index idx
10610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10619 \begin_layout Standard
10620 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10621 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10622 ) not to break the line at
10624 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10627 \begin_layout Quote
10628 Further documentation is given in section
10629 \begin_inset Newline newline
10633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10635 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10643 \begin_layout Standard
10644 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10659 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10668 A protected space is set with
10670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10673 \begin_inset space ~
10681 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10687 \begin_layout Subsection
10689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10691 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10696 \begin_inset Index idx
10699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10700 Spacing ! Horizontal
10708 \begin_layout Standard
10709 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10712 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10716 The length units are listed in Appendix
10717 \begin_inset space ~
10721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10723 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10734 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10739 \begin_inset Index idx
10742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10743 Spaces ! Inter-word
10751 \begin_layout Standard
10752 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10753 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10754 at the ends of sentences.
10755 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10756 automatically takes care about this.
10757 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10758 followed by a period; see section
10759 \begin_inset space ~
10763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10765 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10770 To insert a normal space, select
10772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10775 \begin_inset space ~
10783 arg "space-insert normal"
10789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10793 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10798 \begin_inset Index idx
10801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10810 \begin_layout Standard
10812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10819 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10828 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10829 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10830 inside abbreviations:
10833 \begin_layout Quote
10835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10839 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10842 \begin_layout Standard
10843 or between values and units.
10844 Compare for example this:
10845 \begin_inset Newline newline
10849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10853 \begin_inset Newline newline
10856 10 kg (normal space
10859 \begin_layout Standard
10860 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10873 arg "space-insert thin"
10879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10883 \begin_layout Standard
10884 You can also insert the following space types:
10887 \begin_layout Description
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10893 \begin_inset space ~
10896 space A line with a
10897 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10901 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10905 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10908 negative thin space between the arrows.
10911 \begin_layout Description
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10917 \begin_inset space ~
10920 space A line with a
10921 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10925 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10929 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10932 negative medium space between the arrows.
10935 \begin_layout Description
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10941 \begin_inset space ~
10944 space A line with a
10945 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10949 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10953 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10956 negative thick space between the arrows.
10959 \begin_layout Description
10961 \begin_inset space ~
10965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10969 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10973 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10977 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10981 \begin_inset space ~
10985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10988 em) space between the arrows.
10991 \begin_layout Description
10993 \begin_inset space ~
10997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11001 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11005 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11009 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11013 \begin_inset space ~
11017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11020 em) space between the arrows.
11023 \begin_layout Description
11025 \begin_inset space ~
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11045 \begin_inset space ~
11049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11052 em) space between the arrows.
11055 \begin_layout Description
11057 \begin_inset space ~
11061 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11065 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11070 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11077 cm space between the arrows.
11080 \begin_layout Standard
11082 \begin_inset space ~
11086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11088 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11092 lists the different space sizes.
11095 \begin_layout Standard
11096 \begin_inset Float table
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11102 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11107 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11111 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 \begin_inset Tabular
11122 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11123 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11241 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11400 \begin_inset Index idx
11403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11412 \begin_layout Standard
11413 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11414 feature for adding extra space
11415 in a uniform fashion.
11416 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11417 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11418 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11419 equally between themselves.
11422 \begin_layout Standard
11423 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11426 \begin_layout Quote
11428 This is on the left side
11429 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11432 This is on the right
11435 \begin_layout Quote
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11448 \begin_layout Quote
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11465 \begin_layout Standard
11466 That was an example in the
11472 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11476 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11480 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11483 is one in a standard paragraph.
11484 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11488 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11491 \begin_layout Standard
11492 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11495 \begin_inset space ~
11500 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11503 \begin_layout Standard
11505 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11515 \begin_layout Standard
11517 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11529 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11533 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_layout Standard
11541 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11545 \begin_inset space ~
11551 \begin_layout Standard
11553 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11557 \begin_inset space ~
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11565 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11569 \begin_inset space ~
11575 \begin_layout Standard
11576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11584 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11588 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11590 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11591 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11595 option in the space dialog.
11603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11607 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11612 \begin_inset Index idx
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11624 \begin_layout Standard
11625 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11626 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11629 \begin_layout Standard
11630 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11633 What is correct English?:
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset Newline newline
11642 \begin_inset space ~
11645 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11646 \begin_inset Newline newline
11650 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11661 \begin_inset Newline newline
11665 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11676 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11682 \begin_layout Standard
11684 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11701 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11704 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11708 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11718 \begin_inset space ~
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11725 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11734 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11735 That is why it is named
11736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11744 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11745 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11749 \begin_layout Subsection
11751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11753 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11758 \begin_inset Index idx
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11770 \begin_layout Standard
11771 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11776 \begin_inset space ~
11782 There you find the following sizes:
11785 \begin_layout Standard
11798 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11799 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11804 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11806 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11809 \begin_inset space ~
11815 \begin_inset Index idx
11818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11819 Document ! Settings
11824 for the paragraph separation.
11825 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11836 \begin_layout Standard
11842 \begin_inset Index idx
11845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11851 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11852 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11857 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11858 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11867 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11876 s are described in section
11877 \begin_inset space ~
11881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11883 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11892 If there are several
11896 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11897 You can therefore use
11901 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11904 \begin_layout Standard
11909 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11910 \begin_inset space ~
11914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11916 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11923 \begin_layout Standard
11924 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11934 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11935 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11947 \begin_layout Subsection
11948 Paragraph Alignment
11949 \begin_inset Index idx
11952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11953 Paragraph ! Alignment
11961 \begin_layout Standard
11962 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11964 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11967 dialog (toolbar button
11970 arg "layout-paragraph"
11974 There are five possibilities:
11977 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11999 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12005 \begin_layout Itemize
12013 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12019 \begin_layout Itemize
12027 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12033 \begin_layout Itemize
12041 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12047 \begin_layout Standard
12048 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12049 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12050 the left and right margins.
12051 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 This paragraph is right aligned,
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 this one is centered,
12064 \begin_layout Standard
12066 this one is left aligned.
12069 \begin_layout Subsection
12071 \begin_inset Index idx
12074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12075 Page breaks ! Forced
12081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12083 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12090 \begin_layout Standard
12091 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12092 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12093 force a page break where you want one.
12094 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 is good at page breaking.
12096 Only if you use a lot of
12100 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12101 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12104 \begin_layout Standard
12105 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12106 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12110 have to change the page breaking.
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12116 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12121 \begin_inset space ~
12127 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12132 \begin_inset space ~
12137 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12139 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12140 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12143 \begin_layout Standard
12144 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12145 at the top of a page.
12146 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12148 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12149 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12150 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12154 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12158 to learn more about
12165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12169 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12174 \begin_inset Index idx
12177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12178 Page breaks ! Clear
12186 \begin_layout Standard
12187 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12188 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12189 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12190 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12191 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12194 \begin_layout Standard
12195 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12200 \begin_inset space ~
12206 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12215 \begin_inset space ~
12220 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12221 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12224 \begin_layout Subsection
12226 \begin_inset Index idx
12229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12238 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12245 \begin_layout Standard
12246 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12248 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12257 \begin_inset space ~
12265 arg "newline-insert newline"
12269 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12286 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12289 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12291 This is useful to avoid
12292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12299 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12302 \begin_layout Standard
12303 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12306 very good at line breaking.
12307 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12308 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12309 \begin_inset space ~
12313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12315 reference "sec:Quote"
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12322 reference "sec:Verse"
12327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12329 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12336 \begin_layout Subsection
12338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12340 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12345 \begin_inset Index idx
12348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 \begin_layout Standard
12359 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12377 \begin_inset space ~
12382 you can insert horizontal lines.
12383 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12384 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12385 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12388 \begin_layout Standard
12390 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12401 \begin_layout Section
12402 Characters and Symbols
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12407 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12408 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12416 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12420 for information on how this is done.
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12429 dialog via the menu
12431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12438 \begin_layout Standard
12439 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12447 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12448 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12450 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12458 \begin_layout Section
12459 Fonts and Text Styles
12460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12462 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12469 \begin_layout Subsection
12471 \begin_inset Index idx
12474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12483 \begin_layout Standard
12484 There are two types of fonts:
12487 \begin_layout Description
12489 \begin_inset space ~
12493 \begin_inset Index idx
12496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12502 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12507 characters) in the font.
12508 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12509 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12510 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12511 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12512 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12513 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12514 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12515 \begin_inset Newline newline
12518 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12519 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12520 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12521 sizes than at small ones.
12522 \begin_inset Newline newline
12536 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_layout Description
12546 \begin_inset space ~
12550 \begin_inset Index idx
12553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12559 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12560 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12561 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12562 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12563 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12564 image manipulation program.
12565 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12566 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12570 pixels high up to 34
12571 \begin_inset space ~
12574 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12575 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12576 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12578 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12579 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12580 \begin_inset Newline newline
12583 Bitmap fonts are named
12586 \begin_inset space ~
12591 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12594 \begin_layout Standard
12595 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12596 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12597 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12598 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12599 use scalable fonts.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12606 \begin_layout Standard
12607 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12614 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12615 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12616 font to emphasize text, you use an
12617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12625 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12627 In \SpecialChar LyX
12628 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12632 \begin_layout Subsection
12635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12637 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12644 \begin_layout Standard
12645 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 used its own fonts.
12647 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12648 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12653 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12654 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12655 to a word processor.
12656 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12657 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12658 files are very portable across
12659 different machines.
12660 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 has increased a lot
12662 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12665 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12667 \begin_inset space ~
12671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12673 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12678 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12679 code in the document
12680 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12683 \begin_layout Standard
12684 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12685 engines that are also able directly
12686 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12688 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12690 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12692 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12693 that is installed on your system.
12694 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12697 \begin_layout Standard
12698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12706 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12707 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12715 \begin_layout Subsection
12716 Document Font and Font size
12717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12719 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_inset Index idx
12737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12747 You can set the document fonts in the
12749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12753 \begin_inset Index idx
12756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12757 Document ! Settings
12767 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12768 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12780 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12782 \begin_inset space ~
12785 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12788 \begin_layout Standard
12793 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12794 This requires that you use
12806 as the output format, i.
12807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12811 \begin_inset space \space{}
12814 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12815 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12816 installed (see section
12817 \begin_inset space ~
12821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12823 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12828 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12830 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12831 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12836 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12837 cannot determine the family.
12838 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12839 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12842 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12845 \begin_layout Standard
12846 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12847 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12852 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12858 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12860 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12862 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12865 font encoding, this is
12866 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12867 , depending on the document language,
12870 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12871 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12879 \begin_inset space ~
12885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12895 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12896 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12904 \begin_inset space ~
12910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12918 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12939 European Computer Modern
12942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12950 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12953 \begin_layout Standard
12958 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12959 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12964 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12972 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12978 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12979 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12982 \begin_layout Itemize
12986 \begin_inset space ~
12991 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13004 \begin_inset space ~
13009 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13010 community in order to replace
13014 as the default font.
13015 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13016 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13033 One difference is improved kerning.
13041 \begin_layout Itemize
13042 If you do not like the look of
13050 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13055 \begin_inset space ~
13061 \begin_inset space ~
13071 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13072 \begin_inset space ~
13075 serif and typewriter fonts,
13079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13080 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13087 \begin_inset space ~
13096 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13101 \begin_inset space \space{}
13109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13113 \begin_inset space \space{}
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13127 \begin_inset space ~
13137 but you can also select your own.
13138 \begin_inset Newline newline
13141 The differences between roman,
13144 \begin_inset space ~
13153 fonts are explained in section
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13160 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13165 \begin_inset Newline newline
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13176 was originally designed for newspapers.
13177 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13178 into the small newspaper columns.
13182 \begin_inset space ~
13187 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13190 \begin_layout Standard
13191 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13204 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13209 depends on the class you are using.
13210 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13213 \begin_layout Standard
13214 Note that the font size is the
13219 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13220 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13221 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13222 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13225 \begin_inset space ~
13231 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13238 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13245 \begin_layout Standard
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13254 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13256 \begin_inset space ~
13259 serif or typewriter.
13264 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13274 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13277 \begin_layout Standard
13282 LaTeX font encoding
13284 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13285 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13291 \begin_inset Index idx
13294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13302 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13310 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13317 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13318 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13319 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13323 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13331 \begin_layout Standard
13332 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13334 Use Old Style Figures
13338 Use True Small Caps
13341 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13344 Use Old Style Figures
13346 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13348 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13356 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13360 Use True Small Caps
13362 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13363 of scaled capitals.
13364 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13365 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13368 \begin_layout Standard
13373 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13374 a font to display the script characters.
13378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13379 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13385 \begin_inset Index idx
13388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13395 So this has no effect for the document language
13411 \begin_layout Standard
13414 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13416 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13417 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13423 \begin_inset Index idx
13426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13428 packages ! microtype
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13440 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13442 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13447 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13448 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13454 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13455 \begin_inset space ~
13459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13461 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13471 \begin_layout Standard
13472 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13476 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13484 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13489 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13490 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13492 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13497 dialog, see section
13498 \begin_inset space ~
13502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13504 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13516 \begin_layout Subsection
13520 \begin_layout Standard
13521 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13522 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13524 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13525 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13526 choose a math font in the dialog
13528 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13532 \begin_inset Index idx
13535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13536 Document ! Settings
13542 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13543 automatically selects a math font.
13544 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13545 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13554 \begin_inset space ~
13560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13565 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13566 document font is available.
13569 \begin_layout Standard
13570 Note that the math font will not be used for
13574 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13580 or by the insertion of the command
13587 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13588 \begin_inset space ~
13592 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13593 while the math characters do not.
13595 \begin_inset space ~
13598 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13609 \begin_inset space ~
13614 in the document font settings.
13617 \begin_layout Standard
13618 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13619 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13620 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13621 font (in most cases
13622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13628 \begin_inset space ~
13634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13637 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13638 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13658 \begin_layout Subsection
13660 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13662 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13670 name "subsec:charstyles"
13677 \begin_inset Index idx
13680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13687 \begin_inset Index idx
13690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13699 \begin_layout Standard
13700 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13701 automatically changes the
13702 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13705 style for certain paragraph environments.
13707 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13708 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13710 This is where we meet the concept of
13716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13718 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13722 \begin_layout Standard
13724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13729 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13731 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13753 e., available with all document classes.
13754 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13758 for specific purposes.
13759 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13762 \begin_layout Standard
13764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13765 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13775 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13779 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13792 — you customized the
13797 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13798 among them, encourage the use of
13810 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13811 \begin_inset space ~
13815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13817 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13822 Rather than fiddling with
13826 , they encourage the use of
13830 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13835 \begin_inset Quotes els
13839 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13842 ), not their form (
13843 \begin_inset Quotes els
13847 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13851 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13852 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13853 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13854 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13855 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13856 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13862 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13866 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13867 With a semantic markup (such as
13871 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13876 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13878 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13879 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13885 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13886 by \SpecialChar LyX
13892 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13894 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13895 Builtin Text Styles
13896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13898 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13905 \begin_layout Standard
13907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
13908 The two builtin text styles can be
13909 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13913 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
13917 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
13918 both of these styles
13921 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
13929 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
13935 \begin_layout Standard
13940 style, do one of the following:
13943 \begin_layout Itemize
13944 click on the toolbar button
13953 \begin_layout Itemize
13954 use the key binding
13961 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
13965 \begin_layout Itemize
13967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
13975 arg "dialog-show character"
13981 arg "dialog-show character"
13984 ) as described in section
13985 \begin_inset space ~
13989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13991 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14000 \begin_layout Standard
14001 These commands are all toggles.
14006 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14009 \begin_layout Standard
14010 One typically uses the
14014 style for proper names.
14016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14023 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14029 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14033 \begin_layout Standard
14035 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14040 is producing text in
14044 , but the definition can be changed.
14049 \begin_layout Standard
14051 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14061 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14068 \begin_layout Itemize
14069 clicking on the toolbar button
14078 \begin_layout Itemize
14079 using the keybindings
14086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14090 \begin_layout Itemize
14092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14100 arg "dialog-show character"
14106 arg "dialog-show character"
14109 ) as described in section
14110 \begin_inset space ~
14114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14116 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14125 \begin_layout Standard
14130 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14134 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14137 packages use a different font
14138 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14139 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14145 \begin_layout Standard
14146 We've been using the
14150 style all over the place in this document.
14151 Here's one more example:
14154 \begin_layout Quotation
14158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14160 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14166 \begin_layout Standard
14167 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14168 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14169 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14170 the common tendency to overuse
14171 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14178 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14182 \begin_layout Standard
14184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14185 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14186 only as font changes and integrated in the
14194 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14197 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14206 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14210 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14213 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14215 \begin_inset space ~
14218 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14226 arg "dialog-show character"
14232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14234 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14240 arg "dialog-show character"
14244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14250 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14254 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14261 \begin_layout Standard
14263 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14264 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14266 \begin_inset space ~
14270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14272 reference "subsec:Modules"
14279 ), or local layout settings (see section
14280 \begin_inset space ~
14284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14286 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14291 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14295 markup for specific functions.
14296 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14301 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14311 \begin_inset Quotes els
14315 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14321 \begin_layout Standard
14323 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14324 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14332 \begin_layout Standard
14334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14335 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14340 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14341 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14342 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14347 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14348 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14361 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14362 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14363 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14364 \begin_inset Flex Code
14367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14378 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14383 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14392 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14397 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14406 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14407 on screen their formal appearance.
14412 \begin_layout Subsection
14414 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14426 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14428 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14434 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14436 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14442 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14447 \begin_inset Index idx
14450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14459 \begin_layout Standard
14460 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14461 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14464 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14466 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14468 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14472 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14473 the properties of text passages
14474 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14478 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14479 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14480 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14481 from ordinary dialog.
14482 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14486 \begin_layout Standard
14488 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14489 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14490 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14491 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14492 the properties of the respective text passages.
14497 comes in as a last resort.
14502 \begin_layout Standard
14503 Before we document how to
14504 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14505 use custom character style
14506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14507 tweak the text properties
14509 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14510 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14516 \begin_inset Newline newline
14519 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14520 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14523 \begin_layout Standard
14525 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14526 use custom character styles
14527 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14528 tweak text properties
14531 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14536 \begin_inset space ~
14539 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14547 arg "dialog-show character"
14552 dialog or press the toolbar button
14555 arg "dialog-show character"
14560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14563 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14564 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14569 property that you can choose.
14570 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14573 \begin_inset space ~
14578 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14580 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14591 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14592 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14593 environments all at once.
14596 \begin_layout Standard
14598 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14600 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14603 properties, and their options (in addition to
14606 \begin_inset space ~
14612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14616 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14624 \begin_layout Labeling
14625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14639 The possible options are:
14643 \begin_layout Labeling
14644 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14649 This is the Roman font family.
14650 Normally a serif font.
14651 It's also the default family.
14661 \begin_layout Labeling
14662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14666 \begin_inset space ~
14673 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14685 \begin_layout Labeling
14686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14693 This is the Typewriter font family.
14699 arg "font-typewriter"
14705 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14709 \begin_layout Standard
14711 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14712 The general differences of these families are:
14715 \begin_layout Itemize
14717 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14722 fonts use characters with serifs.
14723 These are the small
14724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14731 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14732 The following example shows the difference:
14733 \begin_inset Newline newline
14737 \begin_inset Newline newline
14742 text without serifs
14745 \begin_inset Newline newline
14748 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14749 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14756 \begin_layout Itemize
14758 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14763 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14764 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14765 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14768 \begin_layout Itemize
14770 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14783 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14801 \begin_inset Newline newline
14805 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14821 \begin_inset Note Note
14824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14826 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14827 For more on phantoms see section
14828 \begin_inset space ~
14832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14834 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14844 \begin_inset Newline newline
14853 \begin_layout Labeling
14854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14859 This corresponds to the print weight.
14864 \begin_layout Labeling
14865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14870 This is the Medium font series.
14871 It's also the default series.
14874 \begin_layout Labeling
14875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14882 This is the Bold font series.
14895 \begin_layout Labeling
14896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14901 As the name implies.
14906 \begin_layout Labeling
14907 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14912 This is the Upright font shape.
14913 It's also the default shape.
14916 \begin_layout Labeling
14917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14927 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
14932 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
14937 s the Italic font shape
14943 \begin_layout Labeling
14944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14951 This is the Slanted font shape
14953 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14954 , this is different from italic).
14957 \begin_layout Labeling
14958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14962 \begin_inset space ~
14969 This is the Small caps font shape
14976 \begin_layout Labeling
14977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14982 Alters the text color.
14983 Note that not all DVI
14984 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
14986 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
14989 viewers are able to display colors.
14991 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
14995 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15004 , which means that the document default color set in
15006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15007 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15013 \begin_inset space ~
15019 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15025 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15105 \begin_inset Index idx
15108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15117 \begin_layout Labeling
15118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15123 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15124 the language of the document.
15125 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15127 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15130 in blue to indicate the change
15131 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15132 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15136 \begin_inset Newline newline
15139 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15141 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15142 When using the spell checking (see section
15143 \begin_inset space ~
15147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15149 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15153 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15156 \begin_inset Newline newline
15159 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15161 Exclude from Spellchecking
15164 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15167 \begin_layout Labeling
15168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15173 Alters the size of the font.
15175 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15177 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15181 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15184 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15185 document font size.
15186 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15187 the details, but a general description of what
15193 \begin_layout Labeling
15194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15215 arg "font-size tiny"
15221 \begin_layout Labeling
15222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15243 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15249 \begin_layout Labeling
15250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15271 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15277 \begin_layout Labeling
15278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15299 arg "font-size small"
15305 \begin_layout Labeling
15306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15320 It's also the default size.
15324 arg "font-size normal"
15330 \begin_layout Labeling
15331 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15352 arg "font-size large"
15358 \begin_layout Labeling
15359 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15380 arg "font-size larger"
15386 \begin_layout Labeling
15387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15408 arg "font-size largest"
15414 \begin_layout Labeling
15415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15436 arg "font-size huge"
15442 \begin_layout Labeling
15443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15464 arg "font-size giant"
15470 \begin_layout Labeling
15471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15476 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 arg "font-size increase"
15502 \begin_layout Labeling
15503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15508 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15528 arg "font-size decrease"
15535 \begin_layout Standard
15540 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15541 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15543 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15544 — use those instead.
15545 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15548 \begin_layout Labeling
15549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15551 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15555 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15561 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15562 change a few other things at the character level
15563 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15564 have text passages being underlined
15568 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15569 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15570 days, when you could not change fonts.
15571 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15572 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15573 because some people
15577 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15584 \begin_layout Labeling
15585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15594 This is text with emphasize on
15597 This might seem like the same as
15601 , but it is actually a bit different.
15607 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15609 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15610 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15614 \begin_layout Labeling
15615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15617 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15622 Don't use underlining.
15627 \begin_layout Labeling
15628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15630 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15634 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15642 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15653 arg "font-underline"
15659 \begin_inset Newline newline
15663 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15666 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15667 when you could not change fonts.
15668 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15669 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15670 because some people
15674 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15679 \begin_layout Labeling
15680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15684 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15686 \begin_inset space ~
15695 This is text with Double under
15696 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15698 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15707 arg "font-underunderline"
15711 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15713 \begin_inset Newline newline
15716 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15717 about double underbar
15722 \begin_layout Labeling
15723 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15727 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15729 \begin_inset space ~
15738 This is text with Wavy under
15739 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15750 arg "font-underwave"
15754 \begin_inset Newline newline
15757 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15758 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15759 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15764 \begin_layout Labeling
15765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15772 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15778 \begin_layout Labeling
15779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15781 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15786 Don't use strikethrough.
15789 \begin_layout Labeling
15790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15796 \begin_inset space ~
15800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15808 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15811 Single strikethrough
15819 arg "font-strikeout"
15823 \begin_inset Newline newline
15826 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15827 changed in the meantime.
15830 \begin_layout Labeling
15831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15833 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15841 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15847 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15857 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15863 \begin_inset Newline newline
15866 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15870 \begin_layout Standard
15872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15873 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15874 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15875 \begin_inset space ~
15879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15881 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15888 \begin_layout Itemize
15890 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15897 This is text with emphasize on
15902 \begin_layout Itemize
15906 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15913 This is text with Noun on.
15915 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
15922 , this is a logical attribute.
15923 Normally it's equivalent to
15926 \begin_inset space ~
15936 \begin_layout Standard
15937 So you have a huge number of combinations to
15938 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
15940 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
15945 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
15946 chosen a new character style
15947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
15948 applied a text property
15951 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
15954 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15956 \begin_inset space ~
15959 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15961 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
15967 arg "dialog-show character"
15975 arg "dialog-show character"
15978 ) dialog, the settings are
15979 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
15983 You can activate the
15984 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
15986 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
15987 last applied properties
15989 by using the toolbar button
15992 arg "textstyle-apply"
15996 The button lets you apply
15997 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
15998 your custom character style
15999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16002 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16005 \begin_layout Standard
16006 To completely reset the
16007 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16009 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16010 text properties of a selection
16012 to the default, use
16020 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16021 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16022 you just set the shape to
16023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16041 \begin_inset space ~
16055 \begin_layout Standard
16057 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16058 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16066 \begin_inset space ~
16078 \begin_layout Itemize
16080 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16093 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16111 \begin_inset Newline newline
16115 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 \begin_inset Note Note
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16133 For more on phantoms see section
16134 \begin_inset space ~
16138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16140 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16150 \begin_inset Newline newline
16156 \begin_layout Itemize
16158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16163 fonts use characters with serifs.
16164 These are the small
16165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16172 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16173 The following example shows the difference:
16174 \begin_inset Newline newline
16178 \begin_inset Newline newline
16183 text without serifs
16186 \begin_inset Newline newline
16189 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16190 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16197 \begin_layout Itemize
16199 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16204 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16205 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16206 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16211 \begin_layout Standard
16213 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16221 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16222 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16225 \begin_inset space ~
16230 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16231 the property to be removed.
16232 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16233 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16234 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16252 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16253 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16261 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16265 \begin_inset space ~
16270 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16281 If you, for example, set
16282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16300 \begin_inset space ~
16305 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16314 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16319 \begin_layout Standard
16321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16324 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16325 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16328 \begin_layout Section
16329 Printing and Previewing
16332 \begin_layout Subsection
16336 \begin_layout Standard
16337 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16338 using \SpecialChar LyX
16339 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16340 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16341 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16342 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16344 Additional Features
16349 \begin_layout Standard
16351 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16354 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16355 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16356 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16359 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16360 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16361 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16362 to turn your writing into printable output.
16363 This happens in two stages:
16366 \begin_layout Enumerate
16367 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16368 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16370 a file with the extension,
16371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16385 \begin_layout Enumerate
16386 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16387 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16388 to use the commands in the
16392 file to produce printable output.
16395 \begin_layout Subsection
16396 Output file formats
16397 \begin_inset Index idx
16400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16409 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16417 Simple text (ASCII)
16418 \begin_inset Index idx
16421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16422 File formats ! ASCII
16430 \begin_layout Standard
16431 This file type has the extension
16432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16444 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 \begin_layout Standard
16456 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16458 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16459 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16461 \begin_inset space ~
16467 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16468 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16469 bibliography (section
16470 \begin_inset space ~
16474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16476 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16481 If your document includes such material, use
16483 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16484 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16486 \begin_inset space ~
16490 \begin_inset space ~
16494 \begin_inset space ~
16502 \begin_inset space ~
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16512 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16513 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16519 \begin_inset Index idx
16522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16523 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16532 \begin_layout Standard
16533 This file type has the extension
16534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16545 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16548 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16549 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16550 -Errors or to process it manually
16551 with console commands.
16552 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16553 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16554 's temporary directory whenever you
16555 view or export your document.
16558 \begin_layout Standard
16559 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16560 -file using the menu
16562 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16563 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16567 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16568 export variants are explained in section
16569 \begin_inset space ~
16573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16575 reference "subsec:Export"
16582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16584 \begin_inset Index idx
16587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16596 \begin_layout Standard
16597 This file type has the extension
16598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16618 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16619 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16620 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16624 \begin_layout Standard
16625 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16626 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16627 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16628 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16629 when you view the DVI.
16630 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16633 \begin_layout Standard
16634 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16636 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16637 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16642 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16643 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16645 \begin_inset space ~
16651 The latter option uses the program
16653 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16659 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16662 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16663 font access (see section
16664 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16670 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16675 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16676 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16683 \begin_inset Index idx
16686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16687 File formats ! PostScript
16695 \begin_layout Standard
16696 This file type has the extension
16697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16709 PostScript was developed by the company
16713 as a printer language.
16714 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16716 PostScript can be seen as a
16717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16720 programming language
16721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16724 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16729 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16736 \begin_inset Index idx
16739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16741 packages ! pstricks
16751 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16754 \begin_layout Standard
16755 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16759 Encapsulated PostScript
16760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16763 (EPS, file extension
16764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16776 As \SpecialChar LyX
16777 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16778 convert them in the background to EPS.
16779 If, for example, you have 50
16780 \begin_inset space ~
16783 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16785 \begin_inset space ~
16788 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16789 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16791 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16792 EPS to avoid this problem.
16795 \begin_layout Standard
16796 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16798 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16799 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16805 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16807 \begin_inset Index idx
16810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16817 \begin_inset Index idx
16820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16829 \begin_layout Standard
16830 This file type has the extension
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16847 Portable Document Format
16848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16855 was derived from PostScript.
16856 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16865 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16866 looks exactly the same.
16869 \begin_layout Standard
16870 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16874 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16878 (JPG, file extension
16879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16906 Portable Network Graphics
16907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16910 (PNG, file extension
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16923 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16924 converts them in the
16925 background to one of these formats.
16926 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16927 will slow down your workflow.
16928 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16931 \begin_layout Standard
16932 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
16934 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16940 \begin_layout Description
16942 \begin_inset space ~
16945 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16949 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16952 \begin_layout Description
16954 \begin_inset space ~
16961 ) This uses the program
16963 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16966 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16969 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16972 is a new engine, derived from
16976 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16977 access (see section
16978 \begin_inset space ~
16982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16984 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16989 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16990 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16995 \begin_layout Description
16997 \begin_inset space ~
17004 ) This uses the program
17009 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17015 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17016 font access (see section
17017 \begin_inset space ~
17021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17023 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17028 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17029 vertically written Japanese.
17032 \begin_layout Description
17034 \begin_inset space ~
17037 (cropped) This is the same as
17040 \begin_inset space ~
17045 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17046 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17047 to generate good-looking
17048 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17051 \begin_layout Description
17053 \begin_inset space ~
17056 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17060 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17064 \begin_layout Description
17066 \begin_inset space ~
17069 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17073 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17074 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17078 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17079 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17082 \begin_layout Standard
17086 \begin_inset space ~
17095 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17096 works without problems.
17097 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17098 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17102 \begin_inset space ~
17110 \begin_inset space ~
17115 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17125 \begin_inset Index idx
17128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17129 FileFormats ! XHTML
17135 \begin_inset Index idx
17138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17147 \begin_layout Standard
17148 This file type has the extension
17149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17161 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17162 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17163 When \SpecialChar LyX
17164 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17165 suitable for the purpose.
17166 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17169 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17172 between different formats, which are described in section
17174 Math Output in XHTML
17179 \begin_inset space ~
17187 \begin_layout Standard
17188 XHTML output remains
17189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17196 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17197 features are supported yet.
17201 and the World Wide Web
17205 Additional Features
17207 manual, for more information.
17210 \begin_layout Standard
17211 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17213 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17214 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17220 \begin_layout Subsection
17222 \begin_inset Index idx
17225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17234 \begin_layout Standard
17235 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17236 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17245 or use the toolbar button
17252 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17253 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17254 \begin_inset space ~
17258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17260 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17264 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17266 \begin_inset space ~
17270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17272 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17277 Further output formats can be selected via
17279 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17280 View (Other Formats)
17282 or the toolbar button
17291 \begin_layout Standard
17292 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17293 viewer window using the menu
17295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17301 Update (Other Formats)
17306 \begin_layout Standard
17307 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17310 To have a real output, export your document.
17313 \begin_layout Section
17314 A few Words about Typography
17315 \begin_inset Index idx
17318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17327 \begin_layout Subsection
17328 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17329 \begin_inset Index idx
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17339 \begin_inset Index idx
17342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 \begin_layout Standard
17352 In \SpecialChar LyX
17354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17365 symbol comes in four variants: the
17382 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17388 \begin_layout Standard
17389 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17399 height_special "totalheight"
17404 backgroundcolor "none"
17407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17408 \begin_inset Tabular
17409 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17410 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17411 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17412 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17413 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17414 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17443 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17483 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17506 system key combination
17510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17511 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17523 and the em dash with
17526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17539 is the Mac label for the right
17550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17563 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17564 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17586 system key combination or
17587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17614 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17653 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17659 \begin_layout Standard
17660 Dashes can also be inserted with
17662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17667 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17675 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17676 and 2014 for the en dash).
17679 \begin_layout Standard
17680 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17681 mode and has a length of its own.
17682 Here are some examples:
17685 \begin_layout Enumerate
17686 line- and page-breaks
17687 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17697 \begin_layout Enumerate
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17703 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17713 \begin_layout Enumerate
17714 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17715 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17725 \begin_layout Enumerate
17726 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17730 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17740 \begin_layout Standard
17742 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17744 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17745 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17753 \begin_layout Subsection
17754 Dashes and Line Breaks
17755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17757 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17764 \begin_layout Standard
17765 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17766 case and locale, e.
17767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17773 \begin_layout Itemize
17774 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17775 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17778 \begin_layout Itemize
17779 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17783 \begin_layout Itemize
17784 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17785 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17788 \begin_layout Standard
17789 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17790 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17801 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17804 \begin_layout Enumerate
17805 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17806 \begin_inset space ~
17809 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17811 The Elements of Typographic Style
17814 \begin_inset space ~
17817 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17820 \begin_layout Enumerate
17821 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17828 Prevent Hyphenation
17833 \begin_inset space ~
17849 in \SpecialChar TeX
17855 \begin_layout Itemize
17857 \begin_inset space ~
17861 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17871 height_special "totalheight"
17876 backgroundcolor "none"
17879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17888 \begin_layout Itemize
17892 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17902 height_special "totalheight"
17907 backgroundcolor "none"
17910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17914 \begin_inset space ~
17922 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17926 – sont très utiles.
17929 \begin_layout Itemize
17936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17949 \begin_layout Standard
17950 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17951 \begin_inset space ~
17954 – in contrast to an overfull line
17955 \begin_inset space ~
17958 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17962 \begin_layout Standard
17963 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17967 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17968 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17969 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17974 \begin_layout Enumerate
17975 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17976 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17977 or \SpecialChar TeX
17983 \begin_layout Itemize
17987 \begin_inset space ~
17990 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17991 \begin_inset space ~
17994 – sont très utiles.
17998 \begin_layout Enumerate
17999 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18000 \begin_inset Newline newline
18005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18006 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18007 Optional line break
18013 \begin_layout Itemize
18014 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18015 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18016 should be followed by
18017 a line break opportunity.
18020 \begin_layout Standard
18021 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18022 \begin_inset space ~
18026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18028 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18039 \begin_layout Enumerate
18040 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18041 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18042 or en dashes (see section
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18049 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18060 Changes and backwards compatibility
18063 \begin_layout Standard
18064 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18066 \begin_inset space ~
18069 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18070 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18079 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18080 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18088 \begin_layout Standard
18089 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18091 \begin_inset space ~
18094 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18096 prevents ligation to dashes.
18098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18105 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18110 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18111 after the input (unless the current text font is
18119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18120 The behavior was changed since
18121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18136 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18137 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18138 as non-breakable dashes.
18139 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18148 \begin_layout Standard
18151 \begin_inset space ~
18159 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18161 \begin_inset space ~
18164 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18169 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18170 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18172 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18176 If you used both literal and
18177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18184 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18186 \begin_inset space ~
18189 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18190 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18193 \begin_layout Subsection
18195 \begin_inset Index idx
18198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18207 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18214 \begin_layout Standard
18215 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18216 but automatically in the output.
18217 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18223 \begin_inset Index idx
18226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18233 following the rules of the document language.
18235 does not hyphenate text in the
18239 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18242 \begin_layout Standard
18244 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18248 font and with unusual constructs, like
18249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18257 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18258 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18259 This is done with the menu
18261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18264 \begin_inset space ~
18270 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18272 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18276 \begin_layout Standard
18277 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18278 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18289 would then see the hyphen
18290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 as a line break possibility.
18298 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18299 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18303 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18306 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18308 Prevent Hyphenation
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18321 \begin_layout Subsection
18323 \begin_inset Index idx
18326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18336 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18339 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18346 \begin_layout Standard
18347 When \SpecialChar LyX
18348 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18349 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18351 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18357 appropriate amount of space.
18358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18363 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18364 gets after another word.
18367 \begin_layout Standard
18368 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18369 not work in all cases.
18371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18382 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18383 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18386 \begin_layout Standard
18387 Here are some examples of
18391 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18394 \begin_layout Itemize
18399 \begin_layout Itemize
18404 \begin_layout Standard
18405 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18408 \begin_layout Itemize
18410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18414 this is too much space!
18417 \begin_layout Itemize
18422 \begin_layout Standard
18423 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18426 \begin_layout Standard
18427 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18430 \begin_layout Enumerate
18434 \begin_inset space ~
18439 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18440 \begin_inset space ~
18444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18446 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18451 \begin_inset Index idx
18454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18455 Spaces ! inter-word
18463 \begin_layout Enumerate
18467 \begin_inset space ~
18472 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18473 \begin_inset space ~
18477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18479 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18484 \begin_inset Index idx
18487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \begin_layout Enumerate
18500 \begin_inset space ~
18504 \begin_inset space ~
18508 \begin_inset space ~
18515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18517 \begin_inset space ~
18522 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18523 This function is also bound to
18526 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18532 \begin_layout Standard
18533 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18536 \begin_layout Itemize
18538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18542 \begin_inset space \space{}
18545 this is too much space!
18548 \begin_layout Itemize
18549 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18553 \begin_layout Standard
18554 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18555 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18557 will take care of this.
18560 \begin_layout Standard
18561 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18565 \begin_inset space ~
18571 feature described in the section
18573 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18578 Additional Features
18583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18585 \begin_inset Index idx
18588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18589 Typography ! Quotation marks
18595 \begin_inset Index idx
18598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18599 Quotation marks | see
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18629 \begin_layout Standard
18631 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18632 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18633 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18643 The keyboard character,
18647 , generates this automatically.
18650 \begin_layout Standard
18651 You can specify what character the
18655 key produces by using the submenu
18661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18665 \begin_inset Index idx
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 Document ! Settings
18674 dialog and switching the
18678 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18679 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18681 \begin_inset space ~
18687 \begin_layout Labeling
18688 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18700 \begin_inset space ~
18704 \begin_inset space ~
18708 \begin_inset Quotes els
18712 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18726 \begin_inset Quotes els
18730 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18733 quotation marks (as common, e.
18734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18740 \begin_layout Labeling
18741 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18744 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18748 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18752 \begin_inset space ~
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18760 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18764 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18770 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18774 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18778 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18782 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18785 quotation marks (as common, e.
18786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18792 \begin_layout Labeling
18793 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18796 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18800 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18804 \begin_inset space ~
18808 \begin_inset space ~
18812 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18816 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18822 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18826 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18830 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18834 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18837 quotation marks (as common, e.
18838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18844 \begin_layout Labeling
18845 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18848 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18852 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18856 \begin_inset space ~
18860 \begin_inset space ~
18864 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18868 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18874 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18878 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18882 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18886 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18889 quotation marks (as common, e.
18890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18896 \begin_layout Labeling
18897 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18900 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18904 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18908 \begin_inset space ~
18912 \begin_inset space ~
18916 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18920 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18926 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18930 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18934 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18938 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18941 quotation marks (as common, e.
18942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18945 g., in Switzerland)
18948 \begin_layout Labeling
18949 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18952 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18956 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18960 \begin_inset space ~
18964 \begin_inset space ~
18968 \begin_inset Quotes als
18972 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18978 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18982 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18986 \begin_inset Quotes als
18990 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18993 quotation marks (as common, e.
18994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19000 \begin_layout Labeling
19001 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19004 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19008 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19012 \begin_inset space ~
19016 \begin_inset space ~
19020 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19024 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19030 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19034 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19038 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19042 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19045 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19048 \begin_layout Labeling
19049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19052 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19056 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19060 \begin_inset space ~
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19068 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19072 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19078 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19082 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19086 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19090 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19093 quotation marks (as common, e.
19094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19097 g., in Great Britain)
19100 \begin_layout Labeling
19101 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19104 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19108 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19120 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19124 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19130 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19134 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19138 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19142 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19145 quotation marks (as common, e.
19146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19152 \begin_layout Labeling
19153 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19156 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19160 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19176 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19182 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19186 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19190 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19194 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19197 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19202 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19203 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19204 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19205 the inner marks differ).
19213 \begin_layout Labeling
19214 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19217 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19221 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19225 \begin_inset space ~
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19233 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19237 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19243 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19247 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19251 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19255 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19258 quotation marks (as common, e.
19259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19265 \begin_layout Labeling
19266 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19269 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19273 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19277 \begin_inset space ~
19281 \begin_inset space ~
19285 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19289 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19295 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19299 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19303 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19307 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19310 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19313 \begin_layout Labeling
19314 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19315 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19323 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19329 \begin_inset space ~
19333 \begin_inset space ~
19339 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19347 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19351 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19355 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19359 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19363 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19366 quotation marks (as common, e.
19367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19375 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19376 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19384 \begin_layout Labeling
19385 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19386 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19394 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19400 \begin_inset space ~
19404 \begin_inset space ~
19410 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19418 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19422 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19426 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19430 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19434 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19437 quotation marks (as common, e.
19438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19441 g., in North Korea and China)
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19446 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19447 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19455 \begin_layout Standard
19456 Inner quotation marks
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19462 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19463 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19471 does not necessarily mean
19472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19480 This is why we call them
19481 \begin_inset Quotes els
19485 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19501 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19503 \begin_inset Quotes els
19507 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19510 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19513 arg "quote-insert inner"
19518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19524 \begin_layout Standard
19525 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19526 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19527 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19528 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19529 If you check the setting
19531 Use dynamic quotation marks
19535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19539 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19540 they appear in a special color).
19541 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19542 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19547 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19550 \begin_layout Standard
19551 Individual quotation marks (i.
19552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19555 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19556 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19560 \begin_layout Subsection
19562 \begin_inset Index idx
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 Typography ! Ligatures
19572 \begin_inset Index idx
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19606 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19613 \begin_layout Standard
19614 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19615 print them as single characters.
19616 These groups are known as
19621 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19622 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19624 Here are the standard ligatures:
19627 \begin_layout Itemize
19631 \begin_layout Itemize
19635 \begin_layout Itemize
19639 \begin_layout Itemize
19643 \begin_layout Itemize
19647 \begin_layout Standard
19648 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19651 \begin_layout Standard
19652 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19653 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19661 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19677 To break a ligature, use
19679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19682 \begin_inset space ~
19689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19700 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19717 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19725 \begin_layout Subsection
19727 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19729 \begin_inset Index idx
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 \begin_layout Standard
19745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19746 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19750 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19753 \begin_layout Description
19755 The name of the game.
19758 \begin_layout Description
19760 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19764 \begin_layout Description
19766 The \SpecialChar TeX
19767 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19771 \begin_layout Description
19772 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19773 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19777 \begin_layout Standard
19778 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19784 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19792 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19793 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19794 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19795 converges to the number
19796 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19799 : The actual version is
19800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19808 , the previous one was
19809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19820 \begin_layout Subsection
19822 \begin_inset Index idx
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19834 \begin_layout Standard
19835 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19836 space between two words.
19837 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19847 for units use the menu
19849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19850 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19852 \begin_inset space ~
19860 arg "space-insert thin"
19866 \begin_layout Standard
19867 Here is an example to show the differences:
19870 \begin_layout Standard
19871 \begin_inset Tabular
19872 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19873 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19874 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19875 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 \begin_inset space ~
19886 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 space between number and unit
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19914 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 half space between number and unit
19939 \begin_layout Subsection
19941 \begin_inset Index idx
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19953 \begin_layout Standard
19954 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19956 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19957 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19958 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19959 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19960 These bits of text became known as
19971 \begin_layout Standard
19972 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19973 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19974 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19975 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19976 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19977 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19978 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19979 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19980 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19981 \begin_inset Newline newline
19989 \begin_inset Newline newline
19997 \begin_inset Newline newline
20000 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20001 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20002 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20004 \begin_inset space ~
20008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20010 key "latexcompanion"
20016 \begin_inset space ~
20020 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20027 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20028 's page break mechanism.
20031 \begin_layout Chapter
20032 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20035 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20042 \begin_layout Standard
20043 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20046 \begin_inset space ~
20052 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20055 \begin_layout Section
20057 \begin_inset Index idx
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20076 \begin_layout Standard
20078 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20081 \begin_layout Description
20084 \begin_inset space ~
20087 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20088 \begin_inset Newline newline
20092 \begin_inset Note Note
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20104 \begin_layout Description
20105 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20106 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20107 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20110 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20111 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20113 \begin_inset space ~
20119 \begin_inset Newline newline
20123 \begin_inset Note Comment
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20136 \begin_layout Description
20138 \begin_inset space ~
20141 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20142 set in the document settings under
20144 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20146 \begin_inset space ~
20152 \begin_inset Newline newline
20156 \begin_inset Newline newline
20160 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20170 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20175 of a comment that appears in the output.
20181 \begin_inset Newline newline
20185 \begin_inset Newline newline
20188 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20191 \begin_layout Standard
20192 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20204 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20207 \begin_layout Section
20209 \begin_inset Index idx
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20221 name "sec:Footnotes"
20228 \begin_layout Standard
20230 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20236 or the toolbar button
20239 arg "footnote-insert"
20251 \begin_inset Graphics
20252 filename clipart/footnote.png
20261 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20262 's representation of your footnote.
20272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20291 label, the box will
20295 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20296 Clicking on the box label again will close
20309 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20310 and click on the footnote
20325 \begin_layout Standard
20326 Here is an example footnote:
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20343 \begin_layout Standard
20344 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20345 position where the footnote box is placed.
20346 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20347 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20348 according to the document class.
20350 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20351 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20357 ey are described in the
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20368 \begin_layout Section
20370 \begin_inset Index idx
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20382 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20389 \begin_layout Standard
20390 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20392 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20396 \begin_inset space ~
20401 or the toolbar button
20404 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20430 appearing within your text.
20431 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20432 's representation of your margin
20441 \begin_layout Standard
20442 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20446 \begin_inset Marginal
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 This is a marginal note.
20459 \begin_layout Standard
20460 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20461 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20462 pages, right on odd pages.
20465 \begin_layout Standard
20466 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20469 \begin_inset space ~
20477 \begin_inset space ~
20485 \begin_layout Section
20486 Graphics and Images
20487 \begin_inset Index idx
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 \begin_inset Index idx
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20509 name "sec:Graphics"
20516 \begin_layout Standard
20517 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20518 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20521 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20530 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20533 \begin_layout Standard
20534 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20539 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20540 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20542 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20543 \begin_inset space ~
20547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20549 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20556 \begin_layout Standard
20561 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20562 of the image in the output.
20563 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20567 \begin_inset space ~
20571 \begin_inset space ~
20580 \begin_inset space ~
20584 \begin_inset space ~
20588 \begin_inset space ~
20593 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20594 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20602 \begin_layout Standard
20606 \begin_inset space ~
20610 \begin_inset space ~
20615 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20616 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20618 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20623 \begin_inset space ~
20628 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20629 with the image size is printed.
20632 \begin_layout Standard
20633 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20634 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20636 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20639 \begin_layout Standard
20641 \begin_inset Graphics
20642 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20650 \begin_layout Standard
20651 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20652 the image into a float, see section
20653 \begin_inset space ~
20657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20659 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20666 \begin_layout Subsection
20668 \begin_inset Index idx
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20680 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20687 \begin_layout Standard
20688 You can insert images in any known file format.
20689 But as we explained in section
20690 \begin_inset space ~
20694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20696 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20700 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20702 therefore uses the program
20706 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20707 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20708 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20709 \begin_inset space ~
20713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20715 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20722 \begin_layout Standard
20723 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20726 \begin_layout Description
20728 \begin_inset space ~
20731 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20732 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20733 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20737 Graphics Interchange Format
20738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20741 (GIF, file extension
20742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20754 \begin_inset Index idx
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20789 Portable Network Graphics
20790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20793 (PNG, file extension
20794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20806 \begin_inset Index idx
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20841 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20845 (JPG, file extension
20846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20870 \begin_inset Index idx
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 \begin_layout Description
20906 \begin_inset space ~
20909 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20911 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20912 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20913 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20914 \begin_inset Newline newline
20917 Scalable image formats can be
20918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20921 Scalable Vector Graphics
20922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20925 (SVG, file extension
20926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20938 \begin_inset Index idx
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20973 Encapsulated PostScript
20974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20977 (EPS, file extension
20978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20990 \begin_inset Index idx
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21025 Portable Document Format
21026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21029 (PDF, file extension
21030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21042 \begin_inset Index idx
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21060 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21061 result will not be scalable.
21062 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21076 \begin_layout Standard
21077 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21084 \begin_layout Subsection
21085 Grouping of Image Settings
21086 \begin_inset Index idx
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 Images ! Settings grouping
21098 \begin_layout Standard
21099 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21101 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21102 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21104 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21105 need to manually change each of them.
21109 \begin_layout Standard
21110 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21113 \begin_inset space ~
21117 \begin_inset space ~
21129 \begin_inset space ~
21133 \begin_inset space ~
21139 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21140 and checking the name of the desired group.
21143 \begin_layout Section
21145 \begin_inset Index idx
21148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21164 \begin_layout Standard
21165 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21168 arg "tabular-insert"
21173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21177 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21178 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21179 from the rest of the table.
21180 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21181 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21183 Here is an example table:
21186 \begin_layout Standard
21188 \begin_inset Tabular
21189 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21190 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21193 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21194 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 \begin_layout Subsection
21398 \begin_layout Standard
21399 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21402 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21406 This brings up the table dialog.
21407 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21408 cursor is placed currently.
21409 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21410 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21411 done on all of your selection.
21414 \begin_layout Standard
21415 In addition to the table dialog, the
21418 \begin_inset space ~
21423 helps you in setting table properties.
21424 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21427 \begin_layout Standard
21431 \begin_inset space ~
21436 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21437 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21438 current cell respectively.
21439 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21441 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21442 of text, see section
21443 \begin_inset space ~
21447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21449 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21456 \begin_layout Standard
21457 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21458 using the check box
21467 This will merge the cells to
21471 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21472 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21473 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21474 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21475 in the last row without the upper border:
21478 \begin_layout Standard
21480 \begin_inset Tabular
21481 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21482 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21483 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21484 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21485 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21486 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21497 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 \begin_layout Standard
21618 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21619 -arguments for the table.
21620 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21621 explained in the chapter
21628 \begin_inset space ~
21634 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21635 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21636 but are visible in the output.
21639 \begin_layout Standard
21640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 Most DVI-viewers are
21652 able to display rotations.
21660 \begin_layout Standard
21665 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21670 adds lines for all cell borders.
21673 \begin_layout Subsection
21675 \begin_inset Index idx
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 Tables ! Multi-page
21685 \begin_inset Index idx
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 \begin_layout Standard
21698 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21701 \begin_inset space ~
21705 \begin_inset space ~
21713 \begin_inset space ~
21718 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21719 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21722 \begin_layout Description
21727 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21728 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21729 Except for the first page, if
21732 \begin_inset space ~
21740 \begin_layout Description
21744 \begin_inset space ~
21749 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21750 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21753 \begin_layout Description
21758 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21759 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21760 except for the last page, if
21763 \begin_inset space ~
21771 \begin_layout Description
21775 \begin_inset space ~
21780 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21781 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21784 \begin_layout Description
21785 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21786 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21788 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21792 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21795 \begin_inset space ~
21803 \begin_layout Standard
21804 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21805 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21806 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21812 In this context, first means first in this order:
21815 \begin_inset space ~
21827 \begin_inset space ~
21832 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21835 \begin_layout Standard
21837 \begin_inset Tabular
21838 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21839 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21840 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21841 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21842 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21843 <row endfirsthead="true">
21844 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21850 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21855 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21864 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21874 <row endfirsthead="true">
21875 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <row endhead="true">
21908 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 <row endhead="true">
21939 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 <row endfoot="true">
21972 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23953 <row endlastfoot="true">
23954 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 \begin_layout Subsection
23993 \begin_inset Index idx
23996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24005 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24012 \begin_layout Standard
24013 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24014 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24015 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24016 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24020 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24023 \begin_layout Standard
24024 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24025 for the column in the table dialog.
24026 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24027 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24031 \begin_layout Standard
24033 \begin_inset Tabular
24034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24035 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24037 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24127 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24183 This is longer now.
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24240 This is longer now.
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 \begin_layout Standard
24272 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24273 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24279 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24285 Selection with the mouse or with
24289 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24290 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24291 the selection from outside the table.
24294 \begin_layout Section
24296 \begin_inset Index idx
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24315 \begin_layout Subsection
24319 \begin_layout Standard
24320 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24321 have a fixed location.
24323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24330 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24338 \begin_inset space ~
24343 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24344 too many notes on the current page.
24347 \begin_layout Standard
24348 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24349 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24350 and pages without text.
24351 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24352 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24353 Floats are therefore numbered.
24354 Referencing is described in section
24355 \begin_inset space ~
24359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24361 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24368 \begin_layout Standard
24369 To insert a float, use the menu
24371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24375 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24376 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24378 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24379 \begin_inset Index idx
24382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24389 paragraph within the float.
24390 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24391 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24392 left-clicking on the box label.
24393 A closed float box looks like this:
24394 \begin_inset Graphics
24395 filename clipart/float.png
24400 – a gray button with a red label.
24403 \begin_layout Standard
24404 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24406 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24409 \begin_layout Subsection
24411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24413 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24418 \begin_inset Index idx
24421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24422 Floats ! Figure floats
24430 \begin_layout Standard
24432 \begin_inset space ~
24436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24438 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24442 was created using the menu
24444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24445 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24451 arg "float-insert figure"
24455 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24464 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24468 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24469 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24471 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24473 \begin_inset space ~
24481 arg "layout-paragraph"
24487 \begin_layout Standard
24488 \begin_inset Float figure
24493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24495 \begin_inset Graphics
24496 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24511 name "fig:A-star-in"
24528 \begin_layout Standard
24529 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24530 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24541 ) and refer to it using the menu
24543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24549 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24553 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24554 vague references like
24555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24562 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24563 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24573 For more about cross-references, see section
24574 \begin_inset space ~
24578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24580 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24587 \begin_layout Standard
24588 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24589 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24590 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24591 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24592 as described in section
24593 \begin_inset space ~
24597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24599 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24605 \begin_inset space ~
24609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24611 reference "fig:Two-images"
24615 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24616 You can also set the images one below the other.
24618 \begin_inset space ~
24622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24624 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24631 reference "fig:Star"
24635 are the subfigures.
24638 \begin_layout Standard
24639 \begin_inset Float figure
24644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24649 \begin_inset Float figure
24654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24655 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24660 name "fig:Undefinable"
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24673 \begin_inset Graphics
24674 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24686 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24690 \begin_inset Float figure
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 \begin_inset Graphics
24715 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24727 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24739 name "fig:Two-images"
24756 \begin_layout Subsection
24758 \begin_inset Index idx
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 Floats ! Table floats
24770 \begin_layout Standard
24771 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24774 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24777 or the toolbar button
24780 arg "float-insert table"
24784 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24785 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24786 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24788 \begin_inset space ~
24792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24794 reference "tab:Table-float"
24801 \begin_layout Standard
24802 \begin_inset Float table
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24813 name "tab:Table-float"
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24827 \begin_inset Tabular
24828 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24829 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24830 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24831 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24832 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24983 \end{array}\right]$
24991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25004 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25025 \begin_layout Subsection
25027 \begin_inset Index idx
25030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 \begin_layout Standard
25041 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25042 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25043 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25045 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25053 \begin_inset space ~
25061 \begin_layout Section
25063 \begin_inset Index idx
25066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25075 \begin_layout Standard
25077 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25079 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25080 \begin_inset space \space{}
25087 \begin_layout Standard
25088 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25089 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25095 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25096 and its alignment within the page.
25099 \begin_layout Standard
25101 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25111 height_special "totalheight"
25116 backgroundcolor "none"
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 This is a minipage.
25123 The text is set in an italic style.
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25129 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25130 another formatting.
25138 \begin_layout Standard
25139 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25142 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25146 as described in section
25147 \begin_inset space ~
25151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25153 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25158 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25164 \begin_layout Standard
25165 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25175 height_special "totalheight"
25180 backgroundcolor "none"
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25185 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25191 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25195 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25205 height_special "totalheight"
25210 backgroundcolor "none"
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25215 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25223 \begin_layout Standard
25224 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25230 \begin_layout Standard
25231 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25233 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25240 \begin_inset space ~
25248 \begin_layout Chapter
25249 Mathematical Formulas
25250 \begin_inset Index idx
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25260 \begin_inset Index idx
25263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25294 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25301 \begin_layout Standard
25302 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25307 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25310 \begin_layout Section
25312 \begin_inset Index idx
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 \begin_layout Standard
25325 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25338 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25340 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25341 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25342 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25350 \begin_layout Standard
25351 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25355 \begin_inset space ~
25360 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25363 \begin_layout Standard
25364 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25365 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25368 \begin_layout Standard
25369 This is a line with an inline formula
25370 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25376 \begin_layout Standard
25377 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25378 paragraph, like this one:
25379 \begin_inset Formula
25386 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25389 \begin_layout Standard
25391 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25393 For example, typing
25394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25407 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25408 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25412 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25415 \begin_inset space ~
25423 \begin_layout Subsection
25424 Navigating in Formulas
25425 \begin_inset Index idx
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25437 \begin_layout Standard
25438 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25439 achieved with the arrow keys.
25441 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25442 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25447 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25448 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25452 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25456 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25459 \end{array}\right]$
25467 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25472 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25473 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25476 \begin_layout Standard
25481 , printed in this document as
25482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25486 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25493 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25494 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25495 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25500 For example, if you want
25501 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25509 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25519 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25523 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25528 , since in the latter case only the
25531 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25536 will be under the square root sign:
25537 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25543 \begin_layout Standard
25544 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25546 \begin_inset Formula
25548 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25557 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25558 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25561 \begin_layout Subsection
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25567 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25571 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25572 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25573 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25574 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25575 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25579 \begin_layout Subsection
25580 Exponents and Subscripts
25581 \begin_inset Index idx
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_inset Index idx
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25603 \begin_layout Standard
25604 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25607 arg "math-superscript"
25613 arg "math-subscript"
25616 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25618 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25621 , type in a formula
25624 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25634 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25640 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25644 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25650 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25656 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25665 , you have to use an extra
25669 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25670 For example, if you want
25671 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25677 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25683 Subscripts are similar: To get
25684 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25690 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25698 \begin_layout Subsection
25700 \begin_inset Index idx
25703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25712 \begin_layout Standard
25713 Create a fraction either with the command
25719 or by using the icon
25722 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25728 \begin_inset space ~
25734 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25735 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25736 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25741 To move back up, press
25746 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25747 \begin_inset Formula
25749 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25752 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25760 \begin_layout Subsection
25762 \begin_inset Index idx
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25774 \begin_layout Standard
25775 Roots can be created using the
25778 \begin_inset space ~
25786 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25792 arg "math-insert \\root"
25814 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25820 always produces a square root.
25823 \begin_layout Subsection
25824 Operators with Limits
25825 \begin_inset Index idx
25828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25835 \begin_inset Index idx
25838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25847 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25854 \begin_layout Standard
25856 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25860 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25863 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25864 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25865 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25866 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25867 The sum operator will automatically place its
25868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25875 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25877 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25881 \begin_inset Formula
25883 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25888 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25892 \begin_layout Standard
25893 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25895 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25896 behind the operator and using the menu
25898 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25899 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25901 \begin_inset space ~
25905 \begin_inset space ~
25919 \begin_layout Standard
25920 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25929 \begin_inset Index idx
25932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25939 \begin_inset Formula
25941 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25946 which will place the
25947 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25959 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25960 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25966 \begin_layout Standard
25967 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25974 Have a look at section
25975 \begin_inset space ~
25979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25981 reference "subsec:Functions"
25985 for an explanation of function macros.
25988 \begin_layout Subsection
25990 \begin_inset Index idx
25993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26002 \begin_layout Standard
26003 Most math symbols can be found in the
26006 \begin_inset space ~
26011 under one of several categories; including
26028 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26034 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26035 don't have to use the
26038 \begin_inset space ~
26043 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26045 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26048 \begin_layout Subsection
26050 \begin_inset Index idx
26053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26062 \begin_layout Standard
26063 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26069 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26075 \begin_inset space ~
26083 arg "math-insert \\space"
26087 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26088 For example, the sequence
26093 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26096 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26098 \begin_inset Graphics
26099 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26104 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26105 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26106 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26107 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26108 , because they are negative
26110 Here are two examples:
26113 \begin_layout Standard
26123 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26129 \begin_layout Standard
26139 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26145 \begin_layout Subsection
26147 \begin_inset Index idx
26150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26159 name "subsec:Functions"
26166 \begin_layout Standard
26170 \begin_inset space ~
26175 contains under the button
26178 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26181 a number of function macros, such as
26182 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26186 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26194 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26201 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26202 avoid confusions, because
26203 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26207 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26213 \begin_layout Standard
26214 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26216 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26220 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26226 \begin_layout Standard
26227 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26228 are placed, as described in section
26229 \begin_inset space ~
26233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26235 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26242 \begin_layout Subsection
26244 \begin_inset Index idx
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26256 \begin_layout Standard
26257 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26259 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26260 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26261 commands, for example, to enter
26262 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26265 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26266 Our example is entered by typing
26271 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26278 \begin_inset space ~
26282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26284 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26288 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26291 \begin_layout Standard
26292 \begin_inset Float table
26297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26298 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26303 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26307 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26317 \begin_inset Tabular
26318 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26319 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26320 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26321 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26322 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26406 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26460 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26514 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26622 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26730 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26784 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26838 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26883 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26904 \begin_layout Standard
26905 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26908 \begin_inset space ~
26916 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26919 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26923 \begin_layout Section
26924 Brackets and Delimiters
26925 \begin_inset Index idx
26928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26935 \begin_inset Index idx
26938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26947 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26954 \begin_layout Standard
26955 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26957 For some purposes, using just the keys
26962 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26963 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26964 toolbar delimiter icon
26967 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26971 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26972 \begin_inset Formula
26974 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26982 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26983 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26987 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26990 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26996 \begin_inset Formula
26998 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27006 \begin_layout Standard
27007 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27008 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27012 \begin_layout Standard
27013 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27014 left side and right side.
27015 If you use the option
27018 \begin_inset space ~
27023 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27024 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27026 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27031 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27032 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27035 \begin_layout Standard
27036 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27037 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27038 is to go inside the brackets.
27039 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27044 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27045 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27046 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27050 arg "math-delim ( )"
27056 \begin_layout Section
27057 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27058 \begin_inset Index idx
27061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27068 \begin_inset Index idx
27071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 \begin_inset Index idx
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27082 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27090 \begin_layout Standard
27091 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27095 \begin_inset space ~
27103 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27107 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27108 Here is an example:
27109 \begin_inset Formula
27111 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27120 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27121 \begin_inset space ~
27125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27127 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27132 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27133 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27134 This alignment is set in the box
27139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27188 for every column as default.
27189 For example, the sequence
27190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27201 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27202 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27203 corresponds to the relevant column.
27204 The result will look like this:
27205 \begin_inset Formula
27208 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27209 column & has & has\,right\\
27210 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27219 \begin_layout Standard
27220 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27223 arg "newline-insert newline"
27226 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27227 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27229 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27232 or the math toolbar.
27235 \begin_layout Standard
27236 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27237 It can be created with the menu
27239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27240 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27242 \begin_inset space ~
27254 Here is an example:
27255 \begin_inset Formula
27269 \begin_layout Standard
27270 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27273 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27276 arg "newline-insert newline"
27280 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27285 arg "newline-insert newline"
27288 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27296 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27297 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27298 A new row is created by every further entry of
27301 arg "newline-insert newline"
27305 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27306 Here is an example:
27307 \begin_inset Formula
27309 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27310 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27315 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27316 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27317 \begin_inset Formula
27319 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27327 \begin_layout Standard
27328 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27335 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27336 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27339 reference "eq:asquared"
27344 The other types are described in section
27345 \begin_inset space ~
27349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27351 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27358 \begin_layout Section
27359 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27360 \begin_inset Index idx
27363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27364 Math ! Formula numbering
27370 \begin_inset Index idx
27373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 Math ! Referencing formulas
27380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27382 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27389 \begin_layout Standard
27390 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27392 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27393 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27395 \begin_inset space ~
27399 \begin_inset space ~
27407 arg "math-number-toggle"
27411 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27412 within parentheses.
27413 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27414 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27415 the document class.
27416 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27417 separated by a dot:
27418 \begin_inset Formula
27428 arg "math-number-toggle"
27431 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27432 You can only number displayed formulas.
27435 \begin_layout Standard
27436 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27439 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27441 \begin_inset space ~
27445 \begin_inset space ~
27453 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27456 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27457 \begin_inset Formula
27460 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27466 To number all lines use the shortcut
27469 arg "math-number-toggle"
27475 \begin_layout Standard
27476 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27479 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27480 A label is inserted with the menu
27482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27491 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27492 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27493 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27505 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27506 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27507 We inserted in the following example the label
27508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27515 in the second line:
27516 \begin_inset Formula
27518 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27519 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27524 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27525 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27526 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27530 \begin_inset space ~
27538 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27542 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27543 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27544 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27545 as the formula number:
27548 \begin_layout Standard
27549 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27552 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27559 \begin_layout Standard
27560 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27561 's cross-reference box are described in section
27562 \begin_inset space ~
27566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27568 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27573 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27581 \begin_layout Section
27582 User defined math macros
27583 \begin_inset Index idx
27586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27595 \begin_layout Standard
27597 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27598 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27599 Math macros are explained in section
27602 \begin_inset space ~
27614 \begin_layout Section
27618 \begin_layout Subsection
27620 \begin_inset Index idx
27623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 \begin_layout Standard
27633 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27634 To set a font in a formula, use the
27637 \begin_inset space ~
27645 arg "math-insert \\font"
27648 , or enter its command, listed in table
27649 \begin_inset space ~
27653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27655 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27662 \begin_layout Standard
27663 \begin_inset Float table
27668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27669 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27674 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27678 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 \begin_inset Tabular
27689 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27690 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27691 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27692 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27724 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27751 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27778 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27811 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27865 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27899 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27926 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27960 \begin_layout Standard
27961 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27969 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27985 \begin_layout Standard
27986 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27987 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27992 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27993 space when you need a space in the box.
27994 Here is an example where
27995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28006 denotes the set of numbers:
28007 \begin_inset Formula
28009 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28017 \begin_layout Standard
28018 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28019 You can, for example, put a character in
28028 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28032 \begin_inset Newline newline
28035 So it is better not to use this feature.
28038 \begin_layout Standard
28039 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28040 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28044 \begin_inset Newline newline
28047 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28053 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28054 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28060 \begin_layout Standard
28067 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28070 \begin_layout Standard
28071 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28073 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28074 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28076 \begin_inset space ~
28084 \begin_layout Subsection
28086 \begin_inset Index idx
28089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28098 \begin_layout Standard
28099 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28101 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28105 \begin_inset space ~
28109 \begin_inset space ~
28117 \begin_inset space ~
28125 arg "math-insert \\font"
28129 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28130 in black instead of blue.
28131 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28132 Here is an example:
28133 \begin_inset Formula
28136 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28137 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28146 \begin_layout Subsection
28148 \begin_inset Index idx
28151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28160 \begin_layout Standard
28161 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28162 automatically chosen in most situations.
28180 For most characters,
28188 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28189 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28194 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28195 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28196 thinks are appropriate.
28197 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28200 arg "math-insert \\style"
28204 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28205 For example, you can set
28206 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28209 , which is normally in
28218 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28222 The four styles are used in the following example:
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28226 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28230 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28234 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28238 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28244 \begin_layout Standard
28245 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28246 is set in a particular size with the menu
28248 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28250 \begin_inset space ~
28255 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28256 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28257 will be adjusted to correspond.
28258 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28269 \begin_layout Standard
28273 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28279 \begin_layout Section
28280 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28282 \begin_inset Index idx
28285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28292 \begin_inset Index idx
28295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28306 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28307 that are in common use.
28310 \begin_layout Subsection
28311 Enabling AMS-Support
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28315 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28316 the document by selecting the checkbox
28319 \begin_inset space ~
28323 \begin_inset space ~
28327 \begin_inset space ~
28334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28338 \begin_inset Index idx
28341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28342 Document ! Settings
28350 \begin_inset space ~
28356 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28357 -errors in formulas,
28358 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28361 \begin_layout Subsection
28363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28365 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28370 \begin_inset Index idx
28373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28374 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28382 \begin_layout Standard
28383 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28384 provides a selection of different formula types.
28386 allows you to choose between
28407 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28408 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28415 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28418 \begin_layout Chapter
28422 \begin_layout Section
28424 \begin_inset Index idx
28427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28436 name "sec:Cross-References"
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28444 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28445 's strengths is cross-references.
28446 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28448 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28449 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28450 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28453 \begin_layout Enumerate
28457 \begin_layout Enumerate
28458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28460 name "enu:Second-item"
28467 \begin_layout Enumerate
28471 \begin_layout Standard
28472 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28477 or by pressing the toolbar button
28484 A gray label box like this:
28485 \begin_inset Graphics
28486 filename clipart/label.png
28490 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28492 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28527 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28528 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28544 \begin_layout Standard
28545 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28550 or the toolbar button
28553 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28557 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28558 \begin_inset Graphics
28559 filename clipart/reference.png
28563 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28565 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28578 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28582 \begin_layout Standard
28583 As an alternative to
28585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28588 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28593 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28594 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28596 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28608 \begin_layout Standard
28609 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28610 \begin_inset space ~
28614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28616 reference "enu:Second-item"
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28624 It is recommended to use a protected space
28628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28629 described in section
28630 \begin_inset space ~
28634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28636 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28645 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28646 line breaks between them.
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28653 \begin_layout Description
28654 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28657 reference "fig:Two-images"
28664 \begin_layout Description
28665 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28666 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28678 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28685 \begin_layout Description
28686 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28687 \begin_inset space ~
28691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28692 LatexCommand pageref
28693 reference "fig:Two-images"
28700 \begin_layout Description
28702 \begin_inset space ~
28706 \begin_inset space ~
28709 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28711 LatexCommand vpageref
28712 reference "fig:Two-images"
28717 \begin_inset Newline newline
28720 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28721 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28722 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28723 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28724 it prints “on the next page”.
28725 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28728 \begin_layout Description
28730 \begin_inset space ~
28734 \begin_inset space ~
28738 \begin_inset space ~
28741 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28744 reference "fig:Two-images"
28749 \begin_inset Newline newline
28752 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28758 ; otherwise it behaves like
28762 \begin_inset space ~
28766 \begin_inset space ~
28775 \begin_layout Description
28777 \begin_inset space ~
28780 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28781 \begin_inset Newline newline
28785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28793 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28803 \begin_inset Index idx
28806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28808 packages ! prettyref
28814 \begin_inset Index idx
28817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28819 packages ! refstyle
28830 \begin_inset Newline newline
28833 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28834 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28837 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28842 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28850 is the default and preferred because
28854 supports only English documents.
28855 The format is specified by using the command
28867 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28868 preamble of the document.
28869 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28887 \begin_inset Newline newline
28894 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28899 \begin_inset Newline newline
28910 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28911 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28913 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28914 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28919 , you might do so as follows:
28920 \begin_inset Newline newline
28927 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28932 \begin_inset Newline newline
28935 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28936 the package documentation
28937 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28939 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28945 \begin_inset Newline newline
28956 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28963 \begin_layout Description
28965 \begin_inset space ~
28968 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28970 LatexCommand nameref
28971 reference "fig:Two-images"
28978 \begin_layout Description
28980 \begin_inset space ~
28983 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28984 label for the reference:
28985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28986 LatexCommand labelonly
28987 reference "fig:Two-images"
28992 \begin_inset Newline newline
28995 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28996 Code, if you want to issue a command
28997 that \SpecialChar LyX
29003 , then you may want to use the
29006 \begin_inset space ~
29011 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29021 This is the form needed for e.
29022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29026 \begin_inset space \space{}
29033 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29034 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29036 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29040 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29044 \begin_layout Standard
29045 You can only use the style
29049 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29053 is always possible.
29056 \begin_layout Standard
29057 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29058 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29060 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29061 \begin_inset space ~
29065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29067 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29074 \begin_layout Standard
29075 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29079 \begin_inset space ~
29083 \begin_inset space ~
29088 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29089 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29092 \begin_inset space ~
29097 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29098 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29101 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29108 You can change labels at any time.
29109 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29110 do not need to think about this.
29113 \begin_layout Standard
29114 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29116 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29120 \begin_layout Standard
29121 References are described in detail in the section
29122 \begin_inset space ~
29132 \begin_inset space ~
29140 \begin_layout Section
29141 Table of Contents and other Listings
29142 \begin_inset Index idx
29145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29152 \begin_inset Index idx
29155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29156 Navigating ! Outline
29162 \begin_inset Index idx
29165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29181 \begin_layout Subsection
29183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29185 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29192 \begin_layout Standard
29193 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29196 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29198 \begin_inset space ~
29202 \begin_inset space ~
29208 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29210 If you click on it, the
29214 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29215 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29216 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29218 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29220 \begin_inset space ~
29225 that is described in section
29226 \begin_inset space ~
29230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29232 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29239 \begin_layout Standard
29240 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29241 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29243 \begin_inset space ~
29247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29249 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29253 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29255 \begin_inset space ~
29259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29261 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29265 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29267 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29270 \begin_layout Subsection
29271 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29274 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29281 \begin_layout Standard
29282 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29284 You can insert them via the
29286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29290 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29293 \begin_layout Section
29294 URLs and Hyperlinks
29295 \begin_inset Index idx
29298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29305 \begin_inset Index idx
29308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29317 \begin_layout Subsection
29319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29328 \begin_layout Standard
29329 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29337 \begin_layout Standard
29338 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29340 \begin_inset Flex URL
29343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29345 https://www.lyx.org
29353 \begin_layout Standard
29354 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29360 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29364 \begin_layout Standard
29365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29373 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29382 \begin_layout Subsection
29384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29386 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29393 \begin_layout Standard
29394 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29399 or with the toolbar button
29406 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29415 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29416 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29419 name "LyX's homepage"
29420 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29425 , an Email address like this:
29426 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29428 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29429 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29435 , or a link to a file.
29440 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29448 \begin_layout Standard
29449 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29462 to the link target.
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29466 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29467 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29468 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29469 the text style dialog.
29470 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29474 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29476 name "LyX's homepage"
29477 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29485 \begin_layout Standard
29486 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29490 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29492 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29493 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29497 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29499 \begin_inset Newline newline
29507 \begin_inset Newline newline
29514 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29517 \begin_layout Section
29519 \begin_inset Index idx
29522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29531 name "sec:Appendices"
29538 \begin_layout Standard
29539 Appendices are created with the menu
29541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29543 \begin_inset space ~
29547 \begin_inset space ~
29553 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29554 as the appendix part of the book.
29555 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29558 \begin_layout Standard
29559 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29560 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29561 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29562 and the subsection number.
29563 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29567 \begin_layout Standard
29569 \begin_inset space ~
29573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29575 reference "chap:Credits"
29580 \begin_inset space ~
29584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29586 reference "subsec:Export"
29593 \begin_layout Section
29595 \begin_inset Index idx
29598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29607 name "sec:Bibliography"
29614 \begin_layout Standard
29615 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29617 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29624 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29631 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29636 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29637 \begin_inset space ~
29641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29643 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29648 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29649 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29650 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29654 using a bibliography database.
29657 \begin_layout Standard
29658 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29659 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29663 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29664 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29665 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29666 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29667 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29670 \begin_layout Subsection
29671 The Bibliography Environment
29672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29674 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29681 \begin_layout Standard
29686 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29688 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29697 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29699 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29700 of ASCII characters only.
29704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29709 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29715 \begin_inset Newline newline
29719 \begin_inset Flex URL
29722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29724 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29734 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29744 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29745 \begin_inset Newline newline
29752 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29753 the number of the entry.
29758 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29767 \begin_layout Standard
29768 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29773 or the toolbar button
29776 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29780 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29781 containing the available citations.
29782 Select one or more keys from the list and
29792 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29793 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29797 \begin_layout Standard
29798 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29799 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29800 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29812 \begin_layout Standard
29816 Companion Second Edition
29819 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29821 key "latexcompanion"
29829 \begin_layout Standard
29830 The \SpecialChar LyX
29831 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29832 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29842 \begin_layout Standard
29843 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29850 \begin_inset Index idx
29853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29861 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29873 Author A and Author B(Year)
29874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29881 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29883 Then, if you select
29886 \begin_inset space ~
29891 in the document settings
29892 \begin_inset Index idx
29895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29896 Document ! Settings
29903 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29905 \begin_inset space ~
29911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29913 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29920 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29923 \begin_layout Standard
29924 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29927 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29937 arg "layout-paragraph"
29941 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29944 \begin_layout Subsection
29945 Bibliography databases
29946 \begin_inset Index idx
29949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29950 Bibliography ! Databases
29956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29958 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29965 \begin_layout Standard
29966 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29972 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29974 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29975 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29980 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29982 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29983 your working field in a database.
29984 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29985 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29986 list for that document.
29987 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29992 The database is a text file with the file extension
29993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30004 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30005 The format is explained in
30006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30013 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30017 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30023 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30024 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30025 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30027 \begin_inset Flex URL
30030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30032 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30040 \begin_layout Standard
30042 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30043 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30044 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30046 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30048 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30049 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30050 Those are addressed by
30055 \begin_inset Index idx
30058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30060 packages ! biblatex
30066 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30067 (although it has been significantly
30068 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30078 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30079 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30080 might conversely fail to correctly
30081 handle databases that use specific
30090 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30094 \begin_layout Standard
30095 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30100 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30106 \begin_inset Index idx
30109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30110 Document ! Settings
30122 \begin_inset space ~
30127 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30136 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30138 \begin_inset Index idx
30141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30142 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30152 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30160 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30162 \begin_inset space ~
30168 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30169 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30177 Add bibliography to TOC
30179 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30184 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30185 in the document or just the cited references.
30188 \begin_layout Standard
30189 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30190 style file is a text file with the file extension
30191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30202 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30203 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30204 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30205 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30207 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30213 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30214 \begin_inset Newline newline
30218 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30220 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30230 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30235 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30239 \begin_layout Standard
30240 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30245 \begin_inset Index idx
30248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30249 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30255 \begin_inset Index idx
30258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30260 packages ! biblatex
30268 \begin_layout Standard
30269 Accessing a database via
30273 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30281 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30283 \begin_inset space ~
30289 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30290 you cannot select a
30295 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30299 \begin_layout Standard
30304 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30317 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30318 file (text file with the file extension
30319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30330 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30331 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30333 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30337 \begin_layout Standard
30342 styles are not set in the
30345 \begin_inset space ~
30350 dialog, but in the document settings.
30351 \begin_inset Index idx
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30355 Document ! Settings
30360 However, in the dialog in the
30364 field, which is only visible if you use
30368 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30369 example how its heading will appear).
30370 These options are deescribed in detail in the
30375 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30385 \begin_layout Standard
30386 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30387 \begin_inset space ~
30391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30393 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30404 Bibliography Processors
30407 \begin_layout Standard
30408 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30409 uses a bibliography processor,
30410 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30411 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30412 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30414 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30415 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30418 \begin_layout Standard
30419 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30421 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30422 You can do this on a general level in
30424 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30425 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30426 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30429 or for individual documents in
30431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30432 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30436 The following variants are available by default:
30439 \begin_layout Description
30440 biber a specific, modern processor
30441 \begin_inset Index idx
30444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30451 developed exclusively for
30455 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30461 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30466 makes use of; if you use the
30470 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30477 \begin_layout Description
30478 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30479 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30480 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30484 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30487 \begin_layout Description
30488 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30489 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30493 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30497 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30501 features are supported.
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30505 By default (with the
30511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30512 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30525 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30526 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30527 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30530 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30531 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30544 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30545 -based bibliography styles).
30546 This should suit most needs.
30549 \begin_layout Standard
30550 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30551 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30552 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30557 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30558 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30559 You can adjust it in
30561 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30562 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30563 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30569 \begin_layout Standard
30570 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30571 can add below the selection.
30572 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30573 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30579 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30593 \begin_layout Standard
30595 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30597 These are explained in detail in section
30599 Customizing Bibliographies
30603 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30608 Additional Features
30613 \begin_layout Subsection
30615 \begin_inset Index idx
30618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30619 Bibliography ! Citation format
30625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30627 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30634 \begin_layout Standard
30635 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30640 \begin_inset space \space{}
30643 numerical citation (as
30644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30651 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30659 ) or author-year citations (as
30660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30669 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30673 \begin_layout Standard
30674 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30678 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30682 \begin_inset Index idx
30685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30686 Document ! Settings
30691 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30697 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30698 labels, is there to use
30701 \begin_inset space ~
30712 \begin_inset space ~
30717 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30720 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30727 \begin_layout Standard
30728 With a bibliography database (see
30729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30731 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30738 ) one has in contrary to the
30742 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30743 These style formats are available:
30746 \begin_layout Description
30748 \begin_inset space ~
30751 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30752 -based approached without any additional packages
30753 (simple numeric citations).
30756 \begin_layout Description
30757 Biblatex loads the package
30762 \begin_inset Index idx
30765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30767 packages ! biblatex
30772 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30774 Biblatex citation style
30778 Biblatex bibliography style
30781 Options to the package
30785 can be entered in the
30792 \begin_layout Description
30794 \begin_inset space ~
30798 \begin_inset space ~
30801 mode) loads the package
30805 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30806 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30818 behavior very closely.
30823 this option has some additional styles.
30828 styles are also supported by this variant.
30831 \begin_layout Description
30833 \begin_inset space ~
30836 (BibTeX) loads the package
30841 \begin_inset Index idx
30844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30851 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30854 \begin_layout Description
30856 \begin_inset space ~
30859 (BibTeX) loads the package
30864 \begin_inset Index idx
30867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30874 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30877 \begin_layout Standard
30886 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30888 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30897 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30899 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30900 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30902 Biblatex citation style
30905 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30911 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30917 are available in the
30922 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30923 a name prefix such as
30924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30939 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30944 \begin_inset space \space{}
30948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30960 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30966 \begin_inset space \space{}
30969 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30975 \begin_inset space \space{}
30979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30991 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30995 \begin_inset space ~
31003 \begin_inset space ~
31009 Here is a simple example where the text
31010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31014 \begin_inset space ~
31018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31021 appears after the reference:
31024 \begin_layout Quote
31026 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31029 key "latexcompanion"
31037 \begin_layout Standard
31038 All styles except for
31042 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31052 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31056 \begin_layout Standard
31057 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31058 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31059 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31064 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31065 multi-citation (so-called
31066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31069 qualified citation lists
31070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31076 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31081 dialog will display three columns in the field
31088 \begin_inset space ~
31096 \begin_inset space ~
31104 \begin_inset space ~
31110 If you double-click on an item's
31113 \begin_inset space ~
31121 \begin_inset space ~
31126 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31129 General text before
31135 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31138 \begin_layout Section
31140 \begin_inset Index idx
31143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31159 \begin_layout Standard
31160 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31164 \begin_inset space ~
31169 or the toolbar button
31176 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31177 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31178 by \SpecialChar LyX
31179 as the index entry.
31182 \begin_layout Standard
31183 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31186 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31188 \begin_inset space ~
31194 A light blue box labeled
31195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31206 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31207 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31211 \begin_layout Standard
31212 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31213 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31214 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31215 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31217 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31219 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31227 \begin_layout Subsection
31228 Grouping Index Entries
31229 \begin_inset Index idx
31232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31241 \begin_layout Standard
31242 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31244 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31245 lists under the entry
31246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31254 First we create the entry
31255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31263 \begin_inset space ~
31267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31269 reference "subsec:Lists"
31274 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31275 \begin_inset space ~
31279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31281 reference "sec:Itemize"
31285 , we insert the command
31288 \begin_layout Standard
31294 \begin_layout Standard
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31304 \begin_layout Standard
31305 for the enumerated list in section
31306 \begin_inset space ~
31310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31312 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31319 \begin_layout Standard
31320 The exclamation mark
31321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31328 marks the grouping levels.
31329 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31330 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31331 If we don't have an index entry for
31332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31339 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31342 \begin_layout Subsection
31344 \begin_inset Index idx
31347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31348 Index ! Page ranges
31356 \begin_layout Standard
31357 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31359 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31360 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31361 an index entry in section
31362 \begin_inset space ~
31366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31368 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31375 \begin_layout Standard
31378 Paragraph environments|(
31381 \begin_layout Standard
31382 and another entry at the end of section
31383 \begin_inset space ~
31387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31389 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31396 \begin_layout Standard
31399 Paragraph environments|)
31402 \begin_layout Standard
31404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31427 respectively start and end the index range.
31428 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31429 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31430 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31431 An example is the index entry
31432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31435 Document ! Settings
31436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31442 \begin_layout Subsection
31444 \begin_inset Index idx
31447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31448 Index ! Cross referencing
31456 \begin_layout Standard
31457 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31458 We referred for example in the index entry
31459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31467 \begin_inset space ~
31471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31473 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31477 ) to the index entry
31478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31485 in the same section using the entry
31488 \begin_layout Standard
31491 GIF|see{Image formats}
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31497 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31498 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31501 \begin_layout Subsection
31503 \begin_inset Index idx
31506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31507 Index ! Entry order
31515 \begin_layout Standard
31516 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31517 follow the rules for the index order.
31518 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31524 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31526 \begin_inset space ~
31530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31532 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31541 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31542 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31567 \begin_inset Index idx
31570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31571 Dummy entries ! maïs
31577 \begin_inset Index idx
31580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31581 Dummy entries ! maître
31587 \begin_inset Index idx
31590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31591 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31596 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31597 maïs, maison, maître.
31598 To achieve this, we use the command
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31604 previous entry@current entry
31607 \begin_layout Standard
31608 In our case we want to have
31609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31624 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31627 \begin_layout Standard
31633 \begin_layout Standard
31634 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31635 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31637 See the next subsection for an example.
31640 \begin_layout Subsection
31642 \begin_inset Index idx
31645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31646 Index ! Entry layout
31654 \begin_layout Standard
31655 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31656 \begin_inset Index idx
31659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31662 This is an italic dummy entry
31667 You can also format the page number using the character
31668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31675 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31676 -command without a backslash.
31677 We can write for example
31680 \begin_layout Standard
31683 italic page number:|textit
31686 \begin_layout Standard
31687 to get the page number in italic.
31688 \begin_inset Index idx
31691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31692 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31697 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31698 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31716 \begin_inset space ~
31722 Have a look at section
31723 \begin_inset space ~
31727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31729 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31733 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31737 \begin_layout Standard
31738 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31746 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31750 to generate the index, see section
31751 \begin_inset space ~
31755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31757 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31766 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31771 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31772 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31775 key "latexcompanion"
31788 \begin_layout Standard
31789 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31791 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31792 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31793 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31794 If so, put the following in the preamble
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31809 \begin_layout Standard
31813 \begin_layout Standard
31819 \begin_layout Standard
31820 in the index entry.
31821 \begin_inset Index idx
31824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31825 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31830 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31831 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31832 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31835 \begin_layout Standard
31836 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31837 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31838 a bold font for all index entries.
31839 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31851 documentation for details,
31852 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31854 key "makeindex,xindy"
31862 \begin_layout Subsection
31864 \begin_inset Index idx
31867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31876 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31883 \begin_layout Standard
31884 If the index generation program
31888 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31889 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31893 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31894 distribution, is used.
31898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31903 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31904 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31905 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31906 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31907 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31917 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31919 dialog, see section
31920 \begin_inset space ~
31924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31926 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31931 The available options are listed and explained in
31932 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31934 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31940 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31944 \begin_layout Standard
31945 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31946 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31950 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31954 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31955 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31958 \begin_layout Subsection
31962 \begin_layout Standard
31963 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31964 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31972 next to the standard index.
31974 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31975 that add this feature.
31982 \begin_inset Index idx
31985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31987 packages ! splitidx
31992 package to generate multiple indexes.
31993 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31999 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32001 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32009 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32010 style, but it also includes
32011 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32012 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32022 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32025 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32028 and select the option
32030 Use multiple Indexes
32037 already contains the standard index
32038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32046 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32047 also appear as a heading) to the
32051 input field and press the
32056 The new index now also appears in the list.
32057 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32058 label color to the new index.
32061 \begin_layout Standard
32062 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32072 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32073 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32074 are additional features:
32077 \begin_layout Itemize
32078 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32079 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32082 \begin_layout Itemize
32083 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32084 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32089 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32090 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32091 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32092 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32095 \begin_layout Itemize
32100 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32101 code in the name of the index.
32104 \begin_layout Section
32105 Nomenclature/Glossary
32106 \begin_inset Index idx
32109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32116 \begin_inset Index idx
32119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32150 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32157 \begin_layout Standard
32158 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32159 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32160 called nomenclature or glossary.
32163 \begin_layout Standard
32164 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32171 \begin_inset Index idx
32174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32182 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32184 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32191 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32196 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32197 and then use the menu
32199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32205 \begin_inset space ~
32210 or the toolbar button
32213 arg "nomencl-insert"
32218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32229 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32232 \begin_layout Standard
32233 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32234 The first is the term or
32238 that you wish to define.
32243 of the term or symbol.
32246 \begin_layout Standard
32247 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32255 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32256 code for nomenclature entries the option
32260 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32268 \begin_layout Subsection
32269 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32270 \begin_inset Index idx
32273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32274 Nomenclature ! Layout
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32283 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32287 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32294 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32302 \begin_inset Newline newline
32310 \begin_inset Newline newline
32316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32323 character starts/ends the formula.
32324 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32325 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32337 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32347 \begin_layout Standard
32348 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32349 syntax is given in section
32350 \begin_inset space ~
32354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32356 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32367 \begin_inset space ~
32372 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32374 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32379 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32386 in this document is:
32387 \begin_inset Newline newline
32392 dummy entry for the character
32397 \begin_inset Newline newline
32409 \begin_inset space ~
32419 font use the command
32448 \begin_layout Standard
32449 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32454 \begin_inset space \space{}
32458 \begin_inset Newline newline
32474 \begin_inset Newline newline
32477 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32478 This command will make the font of all symbols
32485 \begin_inset space ~
32493 \begin_layout Standard
32494 If the characters |
32495 \begin_inset space \space{}
32499 \begin_inset space \space{}
32503 \begin_inset space \space{}
32507 \begin_inset space \space{}
32511 \begin_inset space \space{}
32514 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32515 code they need to be escaped
32516 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32517 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32518 LatexCommand nomenclature
32519 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32520 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32528 \begin_layout Subsection
32529 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32530 \begin_inset Index idx
32533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32534 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32542 \begin_layout Standard
32543 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32544 -code of the symbol
32546 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32548 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32551 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32552 LatexCommand nomenclature
32554 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32562 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32566 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32567 LatexCommand nomenclature
32570 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32576 They will be sorted by
32577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32603 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32606 will be sorted before the
32610 since the character
32611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32618 is considered in sorting.
32621 \begin_layout Standard
32622 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32625 \begin_inset space ~
32630 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32631 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32633 For the example given, you can insert
32637 in this field for the
32638 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32645 will be located before
32646 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32652 \begin_layout Standard
32653 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32658 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32668 \begin_layout Subsection
32669 Nomenclature Options
32670 \begin_inset Index idx
32673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32674 Nomenclature ! Options
32680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32682 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32689 \begin_layout Standard
32694 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32695 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32698 \begin_layout Description
32699 refeq Appends the phrase
32700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32715 to every nomenclature entry, where
32721 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32724 \begin_layout Description
32725 refpage Appends the phrase
32726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32741 to every nomenclature entry, where
32747 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32750 \begin_layout Description
32751 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32754 \begin_layout Standard
32755 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32756 class options list in the
32758 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32762 In this document the options
32769 \begin_layout Standard
32770 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32776 \begin_layout Standard
32777 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32778 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32783 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32786 \begin_layout Description
32796 \begin_layout Description
32799 nomrefpage Like the
32806 \begin_layout Description
32809 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32818 \begin_layout Description
32822 \begin_inset space ~
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32833 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32836 \begin_layout Standard
32838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32845 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32846 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32850 \begin_layout Standard
32859 \begin_inset Newline newline
32865 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32869 \begin_inset space ~
32881 unskip, see equation
32884 \begin_inset Newline newline
32891 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32892 \begin_inset Newline newline
32898 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32902 \begin_inset space ~
32919 \begin_layout Standard
32920 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32923 \begin_inset space ~
32928 in the document settings under
32931 \begin_inset space ~
32939 \begin_layout Standard
32947 \begin_inset Newline newline
32951 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32955 \begin_inset space ~
32967 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32969 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32970 \begin_inset Newline newline
32977 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32978 \begin_inset Newline newline
32982 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32986 \begin_inset space ~
32998 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33003 \begin_layout Subsection
33004 Printing the Nomenclature
33005 \begin_inset Index idx
33008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 Nomenclature ! Printing
33017 \begin_layout Standard
33018 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33020 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33021 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33037 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33038 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33039 You can choose between these settings:
33042 \begin_layout Description
33043 Default a space of 1
33044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33050 \begin_layout Description
33052 \begin_inset space ~
33056 \begin_inset space ~
33059 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33062 \begin_layout Description
33063 Custom custom space
33066 \begin_layout Standard
33067 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33076 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33084 For example, in order to change the name to
33088 , add the following line to the preamble:
33091 \begin_layout Standard
33104 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33108 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33109 \begin_inset Newline newline
33124 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33127 \begin_layout Subsection
33128 Nomenclature Program
33129 \begin_inset Index idx
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 Nomenclature ! Program
33139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33141 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33148 \begin_layout Standard
33154 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33155 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33157 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33162 by adding options, see section
33163 \begin_inset space ~
33167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33169 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33174 The available options are listed and explained in
33175 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33177 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33185 \begin_layout Section
33187 \begin_inset Index idx
33190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33197 \begin_inset Index idx
33200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33201 Document ! Branches
33207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33209 name "sec:Branches"
33216 \begin_layout Standard
33217 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33218 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33219 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33220 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33223 \begin_layout Standard
33224 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33225 allows you to put text into branches.
33226 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33227 To create a branch, either select the menu
33229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33230 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33233 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33242 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33243 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33244 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33245 and whether the name of the branch should
33246 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33247 (see below for an example).
33248 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33249 to the name of the other) and to add
33250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33262 \begin_inset space ~
33265 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33266 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33269 \begin_layout Standard
33270 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33271 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33276 where you can choose a branch.
33277 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33281 \begin_layout Standard
33282 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33283 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33286 \begin_layout Standard
33287 \begin_inset Branch Question
33291 \begin_layout Standard
33296 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33304 \begin_layout Standard
33305 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33314 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33322 \begin_layout Standard
33329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33330 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33333 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33334 Consider for example a file
33335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33342 which has the above branches.
33344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33351 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33375 branch were inactive,
33376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33391 branch was active, likewise
33392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33407 branch was active, and
33408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33411 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33415 if both branches were active.
33416 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33417 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33423 \begin_layout Standard
33424 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33430 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33431 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33435 \begin_inset space ~
33443 \begin_layout Standard
33444 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33448 \begin_layout Standard
33454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33461 branch is deactivated.
33467 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33473 \begin_layout Standard
33474 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33475 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33476 definitions for each branch.
33477 For example you can define for the question branch
33481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33482 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33483 -syntax, see section
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33490 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33502 \begin_layout Standard
33512 \begin_layout Standard
33522 \begin_layout Standard
33523 and for the answer branch
33526 \begin_layout Standard
33536 \begin_layout Standard
33546 \begin_layout Standard
33547 \begin_inset Branch Question
33551 \begin_layout Standard
33555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33583 \begin_layout Standard
33584 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33588 \begin_layout Standard
33592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33620 \begin_layout Standard
33621 Now it is possible to use the
33625 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33632 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33635 commands to obtain conditional output.
33636 Here is an example formula where only the
33643 \begin_inset Formula
33645 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33653 \begin_layout Standard
33654 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33662 \begin_layout Standard
33663 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33669 \begin_inset space \space{}
33672 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33674 For this advanced usage, see the
33680 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33685 \begin_layout Section
33687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33689 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33694 \begin_inset Index idx
33697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33706 \begin_layout Standard
33709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33710 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33713 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33715 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33721 \begin_inset Index idx
33724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33726 packages ! hyperref
33731 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33732 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33733 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33734 part of the document.
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33739 The header information in the dialog tab
33743 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33744 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33745 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33746 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33750 \begin_inset space ~
33754 \begin_inset space ~
33759 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33760 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33761 and author entries.
33765 \begin_inset space ~
33769 \begin_inset space ~
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33778 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33781 \begin_layout Standard
33782 You can specify in the dialog tab
33786 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33791 \begin_inset space ~
33795 \begin_inset space ~
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33804 option allows long links to be split;
33807 \begin_inset space ~
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33815 \begin_inset space ~
33823 \begin_inset space ~
33828 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33831 \begin_inset space ~
33836 colors the different links.
33837 The default colors are:
33840 \begin_layout Labeling
33841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33846 for hyperlinks and URLs
33849 \begin_layout Labeling
33850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33858 \begin_layout Labeling
33859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33868 but you can change these in the field
33873 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33879 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33882 \begin_layout Standard
33887 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33888 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33889 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33892 \begin_layout Standard
33897 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33898 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33899 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33909 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33910 when opening the PDF.
33912 \begin_inset space ~
33915 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33916 \begin_inset space ~
33919 1 will only display the sections.
33922 \begin_layout Standard
33923 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33924 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33930 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33931 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33941 \begin_layout Section
33943 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33947 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33954 \begin_layout Subsection
33957 \begin_inset Index idx
33960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33970 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
33977 \begin_layout Standard
33978 As \SpecialChar LyX
33979 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
33980 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
33981 commands and constructs,
33984 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
33985 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
33986 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
33987 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33988 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
33989 cannot support all packages and
33993 \begin_layout Standard
33994 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33995 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33996 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34000 Code box is created by the menu
34002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34009 or by the toolbar button
34022 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34030 \begin_layout Standard
34031 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34033 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34035 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34040 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34045 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34052 , you can write the command part
34058 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34059 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34063 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34064 Code box behind the word.
34065 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34066 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34070 \begin_layout Standard
34071 \begin_inset Graphics
34072 filename clipart/ERT.png
34080 \begin_layout Standard
34084 \begin_layout Standard
34085 This is a line with a
34089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34112 \begin_layout Standard
34113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34121 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34122 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34123 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34124 know that the command is finished.
34132 \begin_layout Subsection
34133 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34135 \begin_inset Argument 1
34138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34139 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34146 \begin_inset Index idx
34149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34159 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34168 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34169 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34170 uses in the background.
34171 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34172 is based on commands, you can
34173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34181 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34182 any time if you know the right commands.
34183 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34184 is the end of the day.
34185 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34186 all caption labels bold.
34187 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34189 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34193 \begin_layout Standard
34194 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34196 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34198 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34201 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34212 As result you find that the package
34217 \begin_inset Index idx
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34228 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34233 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34237 \begin_inset space ~
34245 \begin_layout Standard
34250 usepackage[options]{package name}
34253 \begin_layout Standard
34254 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34255 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34256 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34257 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34260 \begin_layout Standard
34261 In your case the package name is
34266 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34271 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34272 So you add the command
34275 \begin_layout Standard
34280 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34284 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34289 For more commands provided by the
34293 package, have a look at its documentation,
34294 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34309 \begin_layout Standard
34310 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34312 For example if you use a
34316 class, you don't need the package
34320 , you can instead write
34323 \begin_layout Standard
34328 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34333 \begin_layout Standard
34334 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34335 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34336 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34343 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34346 \begin_layout Standard
34347 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34348 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34350 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34351 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34352 Code box as described in the previous
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34358 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34363 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34371 \begin_layout Standard
34372 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34392 \begin_inset Note Note
34395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34396 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34404 \begin_layout Left Header
34405 \begin_inset Argument 1
34408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34428 \begin_inset Note Note
34431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34432 defines the header line as described below
34440 \begin_layout Center Header
34441 \begin_inset Argument 1
34444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34453 \begin_layout Right Header
34454 \begin_inset Argument 1
34457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34478 \begin_layout Left Footer
34479 \begin_inset Argument 1
34482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34503 \begin_layout Center Footer
34504 \begin_inset Argument 1
34507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34519 \begin_inset Newline newline
34523 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34529 \begin_layout Right Footer
34530 \begin_inset Argument 1
34533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34555 \begin_layout Section
34556 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34559 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34564 \begin_inset Index idx
34567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34568 Document ! Header/Footer line
34574 \begin_inset Index idx
34577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34586 \begin_layout Standard
34587 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34591 \begin_inset space ~
34602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34608 \begin_inset space ~
34614 As a second step add in the menu
34616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34617 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34626 Custom Header/Footerlines
34629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34633 This module offers the following 6
34634 \begin_inset space ~
34640 \begin_layout Description
34642 \begin_inset space ~
34646 \begin_inset space ~
34650 \begin_inset space ~
34654 \begin_inset space ~
34658 \begin_inset space ~
34664 \begin_layout Description
34666 \begin_inset space ~
34670 \begin_inset space ~
34674 \begin_inset space ~
34678 \begin_inset space ~
34682 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_layout Standard
34689 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34690 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34693 \begin_layout Standard
34694 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34695 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34697 \begin_inset space ~
34701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34703 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34707 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34710 \begin_layout Standard
34711 \begin_inset Float figure
34717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34720 \begin_inset Tabular
34721 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34722 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34723 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34724 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34725 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34727 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34745 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34774 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34785 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34789 The normal text on the page goes here.
34790 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34792 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34793 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34798 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34807 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34836 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34847 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34865 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34883 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34888 name "fig:Page-layout"
34892 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34905 \begin_layout Standard
34906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34914 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34918 \begin_inset space ~
34923 is set to “Default”.
34924 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34933 \begin_layout Subsection
34937 \begin_layout Standard
34938 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34939 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34940 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34941 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34943 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34945 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34948 \begin_layout Standard
34949 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34950 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34956 \begin_inset space ~
34964 \begin_layout Description
34967 thepage prints the current page number
34970 \begin_layout Description
34973 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34976 \begin_layout Description
34979 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
34982 \begin_layout Description
34985 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
34986 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
34989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34993 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34996 because it usually goes in a left header.
34999 \begin_layout Description
35002 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35003 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35005 It is normally used in the right header.
35008 \begin_layout Subsection
35009 Default header/footer
35012 \begin_layout Standard
35013 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35014 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35015 footer has the page number.
35016 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35017 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35018 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35021 \begin_inset space ~
35029 \begin_layout Subsection
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35034 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35035 Some pages are different.
35036 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35037 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35038 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35039 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35040 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35044 Header and footer decoration line
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35048 By default, you get a 0.4
35049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35052 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35053 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35065 in the following way:
35068 \begin_layout Standard
35075 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35079 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35092 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35099 \begin_layout Standard
35100 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35102 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35103 \begin_inset space ~
35107 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35118 Several header/footer lines
35121 \begin_layout Standard
35122 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35123 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35124 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35126 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35142 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35144 \begin_inset space ~
35152 \begin_layout Standard
35159 headheight}{height}
35162 \begin_layout Standard
35167 is a size in standard units (e.
35168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35172 \begin_inset space \space{}
35180 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35181 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35182 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35183 logfile with the menu
35185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35200 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35205 \begin_inset Index idx
35208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35210 packages ! fancyhdr
35216 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35217 for your header/footer.
35220 \begin_layout Subsection
35224 \begin_layout Standard
35225 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35226 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35227 This example consists of the following definition:
35230 \begin_layout Description
35232 \begin_inset space ~
35241 , empty optional argument
35244 \begin_layout Description
35246 \begin_inset space ~
35249 Header empty, empty optional argument
35252 \begin_layout Description
35254 \begin_inset space ~
35263 in the optional argument
35266 \begin_layout Description
35268 \begin_inset space ~
35277 in the optional argument
35280 \begin_layout Description
35282 \begin_inset space ~
35295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35299 \begin_inset Newline newline
35303 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35310 in the optional argument
35313 \begin_layout Description
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35324 , empty optional argument
35327 \begin_layout Description
35330 headrulewidth set to 2
35331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35338 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35339 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35355 \begin_layout Standard
35356 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35362 \begin_layout Standard
35366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35370 pagestyle{headings}
35376 \begin_inset Note Note
35379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35380 switches back to page style with the default headings
35388 \begin_layout Section
35389 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35392 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35397 \begin_inset Index idx
35400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35407 \begin_inset Index idx
35410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35421 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35422 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35423 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35426 \begin_layout Subsection
35430 \begin_layout Standard
35431 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35437 \begin_inset Index idx
35440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35442 packages ! preview-latex
35447 (on some systems named simply
35452 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35454 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35461 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35463 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35471 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35472 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35473 -package are automatically
35474 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35478 \begin_layout Subsection
35482 \begin_layout Standard
35483 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35484 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35486 activate the option
35489 \begin_inset space ~
35496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35502 \begin_inset space ~
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35509 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35516 \begin_inset space ~
35529 \begin_inset space ~
35534 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35537 \begin_layout Standard
35538 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35543 \begin_inset space ~
35551 \begin_inset space ~
35559 \begin_layout Standard
35560 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35561 and when you finish
35565 \begin_layout Standard
35566 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35574 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35575 generated by activating the option
35578 \begin_inset space ~
35584 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35592 \begin_layout Subsection
35593 Selected document parts
35596 \begin_layout Standard
35597 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35598 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35599 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35600 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35602 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35608 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35609 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35610 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35613 \begin_layout Standard
35614 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35621 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35633 is explained in section
35635 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35640 \begin_inset space ~
35650 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35651 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35652 the final rotated boxes,
35653 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35654 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35656 Here is the result:
35659 \begin_layout Standard
35660 \begin_inset Preview
35662 \begin_layout Standard
35667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35671 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35677 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35687 height_special "totalheight"
35692 backgroundcolor "none"
35695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35720 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35726 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35748 \begin_layout Standard
35749 Previewing works also for colors.
35750 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35769 is explained in section
35776 \begin_inset space ~
35789 \begin_layout Standard
35790 \begin_inset Preview
35792 \begin_layout Standard
35796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35815 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35820 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35839 \begin_layout Standard
35840 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35846 \begin_layout Standard
35847 If \SpecialChar LyX
35848 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35849 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35850 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35851 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35852 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35853 the \SpecialChar TeX
35855 If \SpecialChar LyX
35856 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35857 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35859 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35860 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35861 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35864 \begin_layout Subsection
35869 \begin_layout Standard
35870 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35871 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35874 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35876 \begin_inset space ~
35881 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35883 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35885 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35886 's main window, then only this selection
35887 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35888 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35889 the source view window.
35894 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35895 ; but note that if you have
35896 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35898 not just the one which is open at the time.
35901 \begin_layout Section
35902 Advanced Find and Replace
35903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35905 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35910 \begin_inset Index idx
35913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35920 \begin_inset Index idx
35923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35932 \begin_layout Subsection
35936 \begin_layout Standard
35937 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35938 allows for searching of complex,
35939 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35941 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35942 The key-features are:
35945 \begin_layout Itemize
35946 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35947 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35948 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35952 \begin_layout Itemize
35953 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35954 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35955 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35956 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35959 \begin_layout Itemize
35960 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35961 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35962 outside of mathematics environments
35965 \begin_layout Itemize
35966 Search may be widened to a specific
35971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35978 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
35979 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
35986 \begin_layout Itemize
35987 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
35988 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
35989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35996 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35999 \begin_layout Subsection
36003 \begin_layout Standard
36004 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36019 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36022 ) or the toolbar button
36025 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36031 Advanced Find and Replace
36036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36040 \begin_layout Standard
36046 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36050 \begin_inset space ~
36055 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36058 arg "paragraph-break"
36062 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36063 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36067 arg "paragraph-break"
36070 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36074 searches backwards.
36077 \begin_layout Standard
36081 \begin_inset space ~
36086 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36100 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36103 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36104 Searching for mathematics
36107 \begin_layout Standard
36108 Mathematical formulas, such as
36109 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36112 or something more complex like
36113 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36116 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36121 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36122 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36123 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36124 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36134 \begin_layout Standard
36135 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36136 This is done by switching to the
36140 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36145 This way, entering in the
36152 \begin_layout Itemize
36153 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36154 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36157 \begin_layout Itemize
36158 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36159 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36162 \begin_layout Itemize
36163 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36164 of it only within section headings.
36165 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36166 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36170 \begin_layout Itemize
36171 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36172 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36179 \begin_layout Standard
36180 The entries made in the
36184 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36187 \begin_inset space ~
36193 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36197 button or alternatively press
36200 arg "paragraph-break"
36207 while the cursor is in the
36210 \begin_inset space ~
36218 \begin_layout Standard
36219 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36221 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36225 \begin_layout Itemize
36226 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36227 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36235 with its typewriter version
36236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36250 \begin_layout Itemize
36251 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36257 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36269 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36276 (you may want to enable the
36279 \begin_inset space ~
36287 \begin_inset space ~
36292 options and disable the
36300 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36308 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36309 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36313 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36316 , or occurrences of
36317 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36321 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36327 \begin_layout Subsection
36331 \begin_layout Standard
36332 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36337 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36339 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36341 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36351 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36357 This is done with the context menu
36359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36360 Insert Regular Expression
36362 while the cursor is in the
36367 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36368 expression matching rules
36372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36373 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36383 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36384 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36390 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36391 same text in the document.
36392 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36393 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36396 \begin_layout Enumerate
36397 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36402 editor the fraction
36403 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36407 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36410 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36411 fractions with the given denominator.
36414 \begin_layout Enumerate
36415 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36427 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36432 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36433 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36434 Also, by inserting a
36435 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36438 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36439 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36443 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36444 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36445 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36448 , and referring back to them through
36449 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36453 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36457 For example, try searching with the regexp
36458 \begin_inset Newline newline
36461 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36464 \begin_inset Newline newline
36467 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36470 \begin_layout Standard
36471 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36474 \begin_layout Standard
36475 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36483 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36484 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36485 sub-expressions is absolute.
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36491 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36494 always refers to the first occurrence of
36495 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36498 in all entered regexps.
36506 \begin_layout Section
36508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36510 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36515 \begin_inset Index idx
36518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36527 \begin_layout Standard
36529 has a built-in spell checker.
36532 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36539 key or the toolbar button
36542 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36545 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36546 beginning of the currently selected text.
36547 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36548 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36549 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36550 scrolled so that it is visible.
36551 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36552 n, if any could be found.
36553 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36557 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36558 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36561 \begin_layout Standard
36562 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36569 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36570 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36572 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36573 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36576 \begin_inset space ~
36584 arg "dialog-show character"
36587 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36589 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36592 \begin_layout Standard
36593 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36594 can be downloaded from here:
36595 \begin_inset Newline newline
36599 \begin_inset Flex URL
36602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36604 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36610 \begin_inset Newline newline
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36617 files for each language.
36618 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36622 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36623 's installation subfolder
36631 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36633 \begin_inset Newline newline
36636 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36637 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36638 but in most cases these are
36654 is the language code.
36657 \begin_layout Subsection
36661 \begin_layout Standard
36664 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36665 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36667 \begin_inset space ~
36670 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36673 you can set the following things:
36676 \begin_layout Description
36678 \begin_inset space ~
36681 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36682 should use for spell checking.
36683 Depending on your platform,
36693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36694 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36695 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36710 \begin_inset space ~
36713 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36716 \begin_layout Description
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36721 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36722 will always use the given language
36723 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36726 \begin_layout Description
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36731 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36737 \begin_inset space \space{}
36741 This should normally not be needed.
36744 \begin_layout Description
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36753 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36765 \begin_layout Description
36767 \begin_inset space ~
36770 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36771 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36772 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36773 appear in a context menu.
36774 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36778 \begin_layout Description
36780 \begin_inset space ~
36784 \begin_inset space ~
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36791 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36795 \begin_layout Section
36797 \begin_inset Index idx
36800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36809 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36816 \begin_layout Standard
36818 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36819 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36829 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36831 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36841 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36843 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36844 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36845 which are available for many languages.
36848 \begin_layout Standard
36849 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36850 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36854 \begin_layout Subsection
36855 Setting up the thesaurus
36858 \begin_layout Standard
36867 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36871 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36876 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36890 For instance, the US English files are named:
36893 \begin_layout Itemize
36897 \begin_layout Itemize
36901 \begin_layout Standard
36910 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36911 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36915 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36916 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36923 ) to the path where they are installed.
36927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36928 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36929 ies, typical locations are
36935 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36939 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36943 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36946 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36952 LibreOffice-<Version>
36959 On the Mac, the default location is
36961 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36962 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36963 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36964 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36965 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36966 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36974 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36975 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36976 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
36980 \begin_layout Standard
36981 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
36982 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
36984 \begin_inset Newline newline
36988 \begin_inset Flex URL
36991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36993 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37001 \begin_layout Standard
37002 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37003 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37005 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37006 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37007 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37014 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37016 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37017 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37021 \begin_layout Standard
37022 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37024 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37027 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37033 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37036 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37037 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37045 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37046 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37047 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37049 \begin_inset space ~
37054 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37057 \begin_layout Subsection
37058 Using the thesaurus
37061 \begin_layout Standard
37062 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37064 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37067 or the toolbar button
37070 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37073 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37075 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37077 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37078 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37079 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37088 ), related terms (such as
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37100 ), compounds (such as
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37112 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37121 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37124 \begin_layout Standard
37125 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37126 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37130 \begin_layout Standard
37131 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37132 the dictionary, such as the above
37136 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37141 \begin_inset space \space{}
37144 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37145 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37146 For example, looking up the word form
37150 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37155 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37160 \begin_inset space \space{}
37171 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37172 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37173 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37176 \begin_layout Section
37178 \begin_inset Index idx
37181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37188 \begin_inset Index idx
37191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37192 Document ! Change Tracking
37198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37200 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37207 \begin_layout Standard
37208 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37209 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37210 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37211 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37218 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37228 \begin_layout Standard
37229 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37243 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37244 You can change the color in
37246 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37247 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37249 \begin_inset space ~
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37258 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37264 \begin_inset Index idx
37267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37268 Color ! Change tracking
37273 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37274 's status bar when the
37275 cursor is in changed text.
37276 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37279 arg "changes-merge"
37285 \begin_layout Standard
37286 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37288 \begin_inset Index idx
37291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37300 \begin_layout Standard
37301 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37307 \begin_layout Standard
37308 \begin_inset Graphics
37309 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37317 \begin_layout Standard
37318 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37325 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37328 \begin_layout Standard
37329 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37335 \begin_layout Standard
37336 \begin_inset Tabular
37337 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37338 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37339 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37340 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37350 arg "changes-track"
37358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37364 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37366 \begin_inset space ~
37369 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37389 arg "changes-output"
37397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37408 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37414 \begin_inset space ~
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37448 Jumps to the next change
37454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37463 arg "change-accept"
37471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37482 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37502 arg "change-reject"
37510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37521 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37541 arg "changes-merge"
37549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37557 \begin_inset space ~
37560 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37580 arg "all-changes-accept"
37588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37596 \begin_inset space ~
37599 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37605 \begin_inset space ~
37614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37623 arg "all-changes-reject"
37631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37639 \begin_inset space ~
37642 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset space ~
37657 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37681 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37715 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37733 \begin_layout Standard
37734 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37740 \begin_layout Standard
37741 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37761 \begin_layout Standard
37762 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37763 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37764 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37765 the next change after the current cursor position.
37766 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37767 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37768 step to the next change.
37769 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37773 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37774 to describe a change.
37777 \begin_layout Standard
37778 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37784 \begin_inset Index idx
37787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37795 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37797 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37804 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37808 \begin_layout Section
37809 Comparison of Documents
37810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37812 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37817 \begin_inset Index idx
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37821 Comparison of documents
37829 \begin_layout Standard
37830 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37833 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37837 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37838 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37840 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37842 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37846 \begin_inset space ~
37850 \begin_inset space ~
37854 \begin_inset space ~
37863 \begin_inset space ~
37867 \begin_inset space ~
37871 \begin_inset space ~
37875 \begin_inset space ~
37879 \begin_inset space ~
37883 \begin_inset space ~
37888 enables the change tracking option
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37899 \begin_inset space ~
37904 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37907 \begin_layout Section
37908 International Support
37909 \begin_inset Index idx
37912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37913 International support
37921 \begin_layout Standard
37922 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37923 with any language you want.
37924 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37925 up \SpecialChar LyX
37927 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37929 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37937 \begin_layout Standard
37938 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37939 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37940 \begin_inset space ~
37944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37946 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37953 \begin_layout Subsection
37955 \begin_inset Index idx
37958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37965 \begin_inset Index idx
37968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37969 Document ! Settings
37975 \begin_inset Index idx
37978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37979 Document ! Language
37987 \begin_layout Standard
37990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37991 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37994 dialog lets you set
37996 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38001 \begin_layout Standard
38006 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38011 \begin_inset space ~
38016 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38017 For details about the different encoding options see section
38018 \begin_inset space ~
38022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38024 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38031 \begin_layout Subsection
38032 Keyboard mapping configuration
38033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38035 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38042 \begin_layout Standard
38043 If you have for example a U.
38044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38047 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38048 can use an alternate keymap.
38049 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38054 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38055 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38056 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38059 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38060 \begin_inset space ~
38064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38066 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38071 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38072 which one you want to use.
38075 \begin_layout Standard
38076 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38077 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38078 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38082 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38083 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38084 one to support the characters you want.
38085 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38092 \begin_layout Chapter
38095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38097 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38104 \begin_layout Standard
38105 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38106 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38107 topic inside the user's guide.
38110 \begin_layout Section
38112 \begin_inset Index idx
38115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38124 \begin_layout Standard
38129 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38132 \begin_layout Subsection
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38137 Creates a new document.
38140 \begin_layout Subsection
38144 \begin_layout Standard
38145 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38146 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38147 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38150 \begin_layout Subsection
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38158 \begin_layout Subsection
38162 \begin_layout Standard
38163 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38164 Click there on a file to open it.
38167 \begin_layout Subsection
38171 \begin_layout Standard
38172 Closes the current document.
38175 \begin_layout Subsection
38179 \begin_layout Standard
38180 Closes all opened documents.
38183 \begin_layout Subsection
38187 \begin_layout Standard
38188 Saves the actual document.
38191 \begin_layout Subsection
38195 \begin_layout Standard
38196 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38199 \begin_layout Subsection
38203 \begin_layout Standard
38204 Saves all opened documents.
38207 \begin_layout Subsection
38211 \begin_layout Standard
38212 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38215 \begin_layout Subsection
38219 \begin_layout Standard
38220 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38221 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38222 It is described in the section
38224 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38229 Additional Features
38234 \begin_layout Subsection
38238 \begin_layout Standard
38239 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38240 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38242 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38243 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38247 \begin_layout Standard
38248 When using the menu entry
38251 \begin_inset space ~
38256 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38264 \begin_inset space ~
38268 \begin_inset space ~
38273 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38274 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38277 \begin_layout Subsection
38279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38281 name "subsec:Export"
38288 \begin_layout Standard
38289 You can export your document to various file formats.
38290 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38292 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38293 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38294 during its configuration.
38297 \begin_layout Standard
38298 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38300 \begin_inset space ~
38304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38306 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38313 \begin_layout Description
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38322 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38324 \begin_inset space ~
38327 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38328 \begin_inset Newline newline
38331 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38332 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38336 \begin_layout Description
38337 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38343 \begin_layout Description
38345 \begin_inset space ~
38348 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38354 \begin_layout Description
38355 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38356 's native DVI-format.
38357 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38358 files paths or file names in your document.
38360 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38367 \begin_layout Description
38368 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38369 in files paths or file names
38372 \begin_layout Description
38374 \begin_inset space ~
38381 ) DVI-format using the program
38383 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38386 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38390 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38398 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38406 \begin_layout Description
38408 \begin_inset space ~
38411 (cropped) the same as
38415 but with cropped page margins.
38418 \begin_layout Description
38420 \begin_inset space ~
38423 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38427 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38432 \begin_layout Description
38436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38444 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38452 \begin_layout Description
38454 \begin_inset space ~
38458 \begin_inset space ~
38461 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38465 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38473 \begin_layout Description
38477 \begin_inset space ~
38486 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38487 source that is compilable with the program
38489 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38493 \begin_layout Description
38497 \begin_inset space ~
38502 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38503 source, additionally all images used in the document
38504 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38508 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38511 \begin_layout Description
38515 \begin_inset space ~
38520 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38521 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38522 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38530 \begin_layout Description
38534 \begin_inset space ~
38543 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38544 source that is compilable with the program
38550 \begin_layout Description
38552 \begin_inset space ~
38556 \begin_inset space ~
38563 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38564 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38570 \begin_layout Description
38572 \begin_inset space ~
38575 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38576 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38582 \begin_inset space \space{}
38587 \begin_inset space ~
38591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38606 represent the version number)
38609 \begin_layout Description
38611 \begin_inset space ~
38615 \begin_inset space ~
38618 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38619 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38620 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38624 \begin_layout Description
38625 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38626 's internal XHTML engine
38629 \begin_layout Description
38631 \begin_inset space ~
38635 \begin_inset space ~
38639 \begin_inset space ~
38643 \begin_inset space ~
38646 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38651 For the conversion the program
38660 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38663 \begin_layout Description
38664 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38669 \begin_layout Description
38671 \begin_inset space ~
38674 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38676 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38679 For the conversion the program
38688 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38691 \begin_layout Description
38693 \begin_inset space ~
38696 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38697 For the conversion the program
38706 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38709 \begin_layout Description
38711 \begin_inset space ~
38714 (cropped) the same as
38717 \begin_inset space ~
38722 but with cropped page margins
38725 \begin_layout Description
38729 \begin_inset space ~
38734 PDF-format using the program
38738 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38741 \begin_layout Description
38745 \begin_inset space ~
38749 \begin_inset space ~
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38762 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38767 \begin_inset space \space{}
38770 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38774 \begin_layout Description
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38783 PDF-format using the program
38785 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38788 , produces PDF-files directly
38791 \begin_layout Description
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38800 PDF-format using the program
38804 , produces PDF-files directly
38807 \begin_layout Description
38811 \begin_inset space ~
38816 PDF-format using the program
38820 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38823 \begin_layout Description
38827 \begin_inset space ~
38832 PDF-format using the program
38837 , produces PDF-files directly
38840 \begin_layout Description
38844 \begin_inset space ~
38852 \begin_layout Description
38856 \begin_inset space ~
38860 \begin_inset space ~
38865 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38866 and then exported as text using the program
38871 \begin_layout Description
38876 PostScript format using the program
38884 options see section
38885 \begin_inset space ~
38889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38891 reference "subsec:General-output"
38898 \begin_layout Description
38899 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38900 source and also code in the statistical programming
38914 it is possible to use
38918 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38922 \begin_layout Standard
38923 If one of the menu entries
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38939 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38941 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38943 \begin_inset space ~
38947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38949 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38954 \begin_inset Index idx
38957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38958 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38967 \begin_layout Subsection
38971 \begin_layout Standard
38972 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38973 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38976 \begin_inset space ~
38980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38982 reference "sec:Paths"
38987 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38996 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38997 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38998 's preferences as described in section
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39005 reference "subsec:Converters"
39012 \begin_layout Subsection
39013 New and Close Window
39016 \begin_layout Standard
39017 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39021 \begin_layout Subsection
39025 \begin_layout Standard
39026 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39029 \begin_layout Section
39031 \begin_inset Index idx
39034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39043 \begin_layout Subsection
39047 \begin_layout Standard
39048 Described in section
39049 \begin_inset space ~
39053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39055 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39062 \begin_layout Subsection
39063 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39066 \begin_layout Standard
39067 Described in section
39068 \begin_inset space ~
39072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39074 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39081 \begin_layout Subsection
39085 \begin_layout Standard
39086 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39087 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39090 \begin_layout Subsection
39094 \begin_layout Standard
39095 Selects the whole document.
39098 \begin_layout Subsection
39099 Find & Replace (Quick)
39102 \begin_layout Standard
39103 Described in section
39104 \begin_inset space ~
39108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39110 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39117 \begin_layout Subsection
39118 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39121 \begin_layout Standard
39122 Described in section
39123 \begin_inset space ~
39127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39129 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39136 \begin_layout Subsection
39137 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39140 \begin_layout Standard
39141 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39145 \begin_layout Subsection
39147 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39151 \begin_layout Standard
39153 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39154 Described in section
39155 \begin_inset space ~
39159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39161 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39170 \begin_layout Subsection
39172 \begin_inset Index idx
39175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 Paragraph ! Settings
39184 \begin_layout Standard
39185 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39186 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39190 \begin_layout Standard
39191 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39192 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39198 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39199 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39201 \begin_inset space ~
39207 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39211 \begin_layout Subsection
39213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39217 \begin_layout Standard
39219 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39220 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39225 \begin_layout Enumerate
39227 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39228 Customize text properties by means of the
39234 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39237 ; this is described in section
39238 \begin_inset space ~
39242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39244 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39251 \begin_layout Enumerate
39253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39254 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39256 Apply last settings
39259 \begin_layout Enumerate
39261 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39262 Change the casing of selected text (
39277 \begin_layout Subsection
39279 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39283 \begin_layout Standard
39285 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39286 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39287 text styles (in the case of this document:
39309 \begin_inset space ~
39313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39315 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39324 \begin_layout Subsection
39325 Table and Rows & Columns
39328 \begin_layout Standard
39329 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39330 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39331 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39334 \begin_layout Subsection
39338 \begin_layout Standard
39339 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39340 It will dissolve this inset.
39341 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39345 \begin_layout Subsection
39349 \begin_layout Standard
39350 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39351 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39354 \begin_layout Subsection
39355 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39358 \begin_layout Standard
39359 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39361 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39362 \begin_inset space ~
39366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39368 reference "sec:Nesting"
39373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39375 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39382 \begin_layout Section
39384 \begin_inset Index idx
39387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39396 \begin_layout Standard
39397 At the bottom of the
39401 menu the opened documents are listed.
39404 \begin_layout Subsection
39405 Open/Close all Insets
39408 \begin_layout Standard
39409 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39412 \begin_layout Subsection
39413 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39416 \begin_layout Standard
39417 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39420 \begin_layout Standard
39421 Math macros are described in the
39428 \begin_layout Subsection
39432 \begin_layout Standard
39433 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39434 \begin_inset space ~
39438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39440 reference "sec:Navigating"
39445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39447 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39454 \begin_layout Subsection
39458 \begin_layout Standard
39459 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39461 \begin_inset space ~
39465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39467 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39474 \begin_layout Subsection
39478 \begin_layout Standard
39479 Opens a window showing console messages.
39480 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39485 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39486 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39487 is processing the document.
39490 \begin_layout Subsection
39492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39494 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39499 \begin_inset Index idx
39502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39511 \begin_layout Standard
39512 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39514 All toolbars and the
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39522 can be turned on and off.
39527 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39539 \begin_inset space ~
39551 \begin_inset space ~
39556 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39560 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39567 \begin_layout Standard
39572 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39576 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39577 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39578 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39579 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39580 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39583 \begin_layout Standard
39585 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39586 \begin_inset space ~
39590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39592 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39599 \begin_layout Subsection
39603 \begin_layout Standard
39607 \begin_inset space ~
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39615 \begin_inset space ~
39619 \begin_inset space ~
39623 \begin_inset space ~
39627 \begin_inset space ~
39632 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39633 's main window vertically while
39636 \begin_inset space ~
39640 \begin_inset space ~
39644 \begin_inset space ~
39648 \begin_inset space ~
39652 \begin_inset space ~
39656 \begin_inset space ~
39661 will split it horizontally.
39662 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39663 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39664 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39665 three or more documents at the same time.
39666 To close a split view, use the menu
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39673 \begin_inset space ~
39681 \begin_layout Subsection
39685 \begin_layout Standard
39686 Closes a split view.
39689 \begin_layout Subsection
39693 \begin_layout Standard
39694 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39695 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39696 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39697 's main window fullscreen.
39698 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39699 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39702 \begin_layout Section
39704 \begin_inset Index idx
39707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39716 \begin_layout Subsection
39720 \begin_layout Standard
39721 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39728 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39739 \begin_layout Subsection
39741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39743 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39750 \begin_layout Standard
39751 Here you can insert the following characters:
39754 \begin_layout Description
39759 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39762 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39763 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39764 -packages you have installed.
39765 You can get a complete display by checking
39768 \begin_inset space ~
39774 \begin_inset Newline newline
39778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39786 Not all characters will be visible in the
39790 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39791 dialog (see section
39792 \begin_inset space ~
39796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39798 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39802 ) can display every character.
39810 \begin_layout Description
39811 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39815 \begin_layout Description
39817 \begin_inset space ~
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39824 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39831 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39838 \begin_layout Description
39840 \begin_inset space ~
39843 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39847 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39853 \begin_layout Description
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39858 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39862 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39868 \begin_layout Description
39870 \begin_inset space ~
39873 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39877 \begin_layout Description
39879 \begin_inset space ~
39882 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39886 \begin_layout Description
39888 \begin_inset space ~
39891 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39897 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39903 \begin_layout Description
39905 \begin_inset space ~
39908 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39912 \begin_layout Description
39914 \begin_inset space ~
39918 \begin_inset Index idx
39921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39928 \begin_inset Index idx
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39932 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39937 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39938 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39940 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39946 \begin_inset Index idx
39949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 \begin_inset Newline newline
39960 More information about this feature can be found in the
39966 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39972 \begin_layout Description
39973 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39975 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39976 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
39980 \begin_layout Subsection
39984 \begin_layout Standard
39985 Opens a submenu with the following options:
39988 \begin_layout Description
39989 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
39990 \begin_inset script superscript
39992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40001 \begin_layout Description
40002 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40003 \begin_inset script subscript
40005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40014 \begin_layout Description
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40019 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40020 \begin_inset space ~
40024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40026 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40033 \begin_layout Description
40035 \begin_inset space ~
40038 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40045 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40052 \begin_layout Description
40054 \begin_inset space ~
40057 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40064 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40071 \begin_layout Description
40073 \begin_inset space ~
40076 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40082 \begin_inset space \space{}
40085 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40086 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40095 To insert a fraction use the command
40100 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40104 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40113 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40120 \begin_layout Description
40122 \begin_inset space ~
40125 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40132 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40139 \begin_layout Description
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40144 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40151 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40158 \begin_layout Description
40160 \begin_inset space ~
40163 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40170 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40177 \begin_layout Description
40178 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40185 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40192 \begin_layout Description
40194 \begin_inset space ~
40197 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40204 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40211 \begin_layout Description
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40216 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40223 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40230 \begin_layout Description
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40239 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40242 \begin_inset space ~
40246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40248 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40255 for a usage example.
40258 \begin_layout Description
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40264 \begin_inset space ~
40267 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40274 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40281 \begin_layout Description
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40286 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40287 as described in section
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40294 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40301 \begin_layout Description
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40306 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40307 \begin_inset space ~
40311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40313 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40320 \begin_layout Description
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40325 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40326 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40334 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40341 \begin_layout Description
40343 \begin_inset space ~
40346 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40347 \begin_inset space ~
40351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40353 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40360 \begin_layout Description
40362 \begin_inset space ~
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40369 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40370 \begin_inset space ~
40374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40376 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40383 \begin_layout Subsection
40387 \begin_layout Standard
40388 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40392 \begin_inset space ~
40413 are described in section
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40420 reference "sec:toc"
40429 is described in section
40430 \begin_inset space ~
40434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40436 reference "sec:Index"
40444 is described in section
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40451 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40457 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40460 is described in section
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40467 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40474 \begin_layout Subsection
40478 \begin_layout Standard
40479 To insert floats, as described in section
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40486 reference "sec:Floats"
40490 and in detail the chapter
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40505 \begin_layout Subsection
40509 \begin_layout Standard
40510 To insert notes, described in section
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40517 reference "sec:Notes"
40524 \begin_layout Subsection
40528 \begin_layout Standard
40529 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40531 Branches are described in section
40532 \begin_inset space ~
40536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40538 reference "sec:Branches"
40545 \begin_layout Subsection
40549 \begin_layout Standard
40550 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40551 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40553 An example is the document class
40554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40561 with three custom insets.
40564 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40568 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40574 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40577 \begin_layout Subsection
40579 \begin_inset Index idx
40582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40591 \begin_layout Standard
40592 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40594 For more information see chapter
40596 External Document Parts
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40605 \begin_layout Subsection
40607 \begin_inset Index idx
40610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40619 \begin_layout Standard
40620 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40621 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40628 \begin_inset space ~
40636 \begin_layout Subsection
40640 \begin_layout Standard
40645 dialog as described in section
40646 \begin_inset space ~
40650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40652 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40659 \begin_layout Subsection
40663 \begin_layout Standard
40668 as described in section
40669 \begin_inset space ~
40673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40675 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40682 \begin_layout Subsection
40686 \begin_layout Standard
40691 as described in section
40692 \begin_inset space ~
40696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40698 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40705 \begin_layout Subsection
40707 \begin_inset Index idx
40710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40717 \begin_inset Index idx
40720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40721 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
40729 \begin_layout Standard
40730 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
40731 Floats are described in section
40732 \begin_inset space ~
40736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40738 reference "sec:Floats"
40742 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
40744 Multi-page Captions
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40757 \begin_layout Subsection
40761 \begin_layout Standard
40762 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40763 \begin_inset space ~
40767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40769 reference "sec:Index"
40776 \begin_layout Subsection
40780 \begin_layout Standard
40781 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40782 \begin_inset space ~
40786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40788 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40795 \begin_layout Subsection
40799 \begin_layout Standard
40800 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
40801 Tables are described in section
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40808 reference "sec:Tables"
40812 and in detail in the chapter
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40827 \begin_layout Subsection
40831 \begin_layout Standard
40837 Graphics are described in section
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40844 reference "sec:Graphics"
40851 \begin_layout Subsection
40855 \begin_layout Standard
40856 Inserts a URL as described in section
40857 \begin_inset space ~
40861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40863 reference "subsec:URLs"
40870 \begin_layout Subsection
40874 \begin_layout Standard
40875 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
40876 \begin_inset space ~
40880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40882 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
40889 \begin_layout Subsection
40893 \begin_layout Standard
40894 Inserts a footnote as described in section
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40901 reference "sec:Footnotes"
40908 \begin_layout Subsection
40912 \begin_layout Standard
40913 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40920 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
40927 \begin_layout Subsection
40930 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
40933 \begin_layout Standard
40934 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
40935 environments of the same type.
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40943 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
40947 for an explanation.
40950 \begin_layout Subsection
40954 \begin_layout Standard
40955 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
40956 title or caption of a float.
40957 Inserts a short title as described in section
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40964 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40971 \begin_layout Subsection
40976 \begin_layout Standard
40977 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
40978 Code box as described in section
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40985 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40992 \begin_layout Subsection
40994 \begin_inset Index idx
40997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41006 \begin_layout Standard
41007 Inserts a program listings box.
41008 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41010 Program Code Listings
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41023 \begin_layout Subsection
41027 \begin_layout Standard
41028 Inserts the actual date.
41029 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41034 \begin_layout Subsection
41038 \begin_layout Standard
41039 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41040 \begin_inset space ~
41044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41046 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41053 \begin_layout Section
41055 \begin_inset Index idx
41058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41067 \begin_layout Standard
41068 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41072 of the current document.
41073 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41076 \begin_layout Subsection
41080 \begin_layout Standard
41081 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41082 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41083 to jump, for example, between section
41084 \begin_inset space ~
41088 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41092 2.5 and use the submenu
41095 \begin_inset space ~
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41106 \begin_inset space ~
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41122 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41126 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41132 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41135 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41138 \begin_layout Standard
41139 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41143 \begin_inset space ~
41148 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41156 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41159 \begin_layout Subsection
41160 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41163 \begin_layout Standard
41164 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41168 \begin_layout Subsection
41172 \begin_layout Standard
41173 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41174 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41175 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41183 \begin_inset space ~
41191 \begin_layout Subsection
41195 \begin_layout Standard
41196 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41199 The \SpecialChar LyX
41200 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41202 \begin_inset space ~
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41215 manual for a detailed description.
41218 \begin_layout Section
41220 \begin_inset Index idx
41223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41232 \begin_layout Subsection
41236 \begin_layout Standard
41237 Change Tracking is described in section
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41244 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41251 \begin_layout Subsection
41259 \begin_layout Standard
41260 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41261 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41262 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41264 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41265 to the clipboard or update the view.
41266 \begin_inset Newline newline
41269 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41273 \begin_layout Standard
41276 Open Containing Directory
41278 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41279 's temporary folder for the document.
41280 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41281 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41282 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41283 For example some journals require to send the
41287 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41291 \begin_layout Subsection
41292 Start Appendix Here
41295 \begin_layout Standard
41296 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41297 as described in section
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41304 reference "sec:Appendices"
41311 \begin_layout Subsection
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_layout Standard
41320 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41321 default output format for the document (menu
41323 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41324 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41325 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41343 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41347 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41350 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41351 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41356 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41361 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41379 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41383 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41384 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41386 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41387 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41389 \begin_inset space ~
41392 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41394 \begin_inset space ~
41397 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41407 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41412 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41413 when it is first configured.
41414 The default output format is
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41425 \begin_layout Subsection
41426 View (Other Formats)
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41431 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41432 actual document with an external program.
41433 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41434 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41435 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41437 All possible formats are listed in section
41438 \begin_inset space ~
41442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41444 reference "subsec:Export"
41449 You should at least see the menu entry
41454 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41456 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41464 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41469 \begin_inset Index idx
41472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41473 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41482 \begin_layout Standard
41483 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41484 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41487 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41489 \begin_inset space ~
41492 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41497 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41501 \begin_inset space ~
41505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41507 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41512 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41513 when it is first configured.
41516 \begin_layout Subsection
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41524 \begin_layout Standard
41525 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41526 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41529 \begin_layout Subsection
41530 Update (Other Formats)
41533 \begin_layout Standard
41534 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41535 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41538 \begin_layout Subsection
41539 View Master Document
41542 \begin_layout Standard
41543 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41564 manual for more information on this topic).
41565 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41566 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41570 \begin_inset space ~
41574 \begin_inset space ~
41579 generates the output of the whole book, while
41583 will just output the chapter alone.
41586 \begin_layout Standard
41587 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41588 in the document settings (menu
41590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41591 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41592 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41594 \begin_inset space ~
41598 \begin_inset space ~
41604 \begin_inset space ~
41608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41610 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41614 ) or in the preferences (menu
41616 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41617 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41619 \begin_inset space ~
41622 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41627 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41629 \begin_inset space ~
41633 \begin_inset space ~
41639 \begin_inset space ~
41643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41645 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41652 \begin_layout Subsection
41653 Update Master Document
41656 \begin_layout Standard
41657 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41673 \begin_inset space ~
41678 manual for more information on this topic).
41679 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
41680 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
41683 \begin_layout Standard
41684 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41685 in the document settings (menu
41687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41688 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41689 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41707 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41711 ) or in the preferences (menu
41713 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41714 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41719 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41724 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41726 \begin_inset space ~
41730 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41742 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41749 \begin_layout Subsection
41751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41753 name "subsec:Compressed"
41760 \begin_layout Standard
41761 Un/compresses the current document.
41762 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41763 compression (see the
41765 Additional Features
41767 manual for details).
41770 \begin_layout Subsection
41774 \begin_layout Standard
41775 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41778 \begin_layout Subsection
41782 \begin_layout Standard
41783 The document settings are described in appendix
41784 \begin_inset space ~
41788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41790 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41797 \begin_layout Section
41799 \begin_inset Index idx
41802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41811 \begin_layout Subsection
41815 \begin_layout Standard
41816 Spell checking is explained in section
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41823 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
41830 \begin_layout Subsection
41834 \begin_layout Standard
41835 The thesaurus is described in section
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41842 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
41849 \begin_layout Subsection
41851 \begin_inset Index idx
41854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41861 \begin_inset Index idx
41864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41873 \begin_layout Standard
41874 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
41875 the highlighted document part.
41878 \begin_layout Subsection
41884 \begin_inset Index idx
41887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41888 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41897 \begin_layout Standard
41898 Generates with the help of the program
41900 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41903 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
41904 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
41905 This feature is not available on Windows.
41908 \begin_layout Subsection
41914 \begin_inset Index idx
41917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41927 \begin_layout Standard
41928 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41933 \begin_inset space ~
41938 to see the full filename paths.
41941 \begin_layout Subsection
41943 \begin_inset Index idx
41946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41955 \begin_layout Standard
41956 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
41957 files as described in section
41958 \begin_inset space ~
41962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41964 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
41971 \begin_layout Subsection
41973 \begin_inset Index idx
41976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41989 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42007 \begin_inset Index idx
42010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42011 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42020 \begin_layout Standard
42021 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42022 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42023 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42024 -packages and programs it needs; see
42026 \begin_inset space ~
42030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42032 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42039 \begin_layout Subsection
42043 \begin_layout Standard
42048 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42049 \begin_inset space ~
42053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42055 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42062 \begin_layout Section
42064 \begin_inset Index idx
42067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42076 \begin_layout Standard
42077 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42078 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42080 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42084 \begin_layout Standard
42088 \begin_inset space ~
42093 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42094 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42095 packages and classes found
42096 by \SpecialChar LyX
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42104 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42111 \begin_layout Standard
42115 \begin_inset space ~
42120 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42125 \begin_layout Section
42127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42129 name "sec:Toolbars"
42136 \begin_layout Standard
42137 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42138 \begin_inset space ~
42142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42144 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42151 \begin_layout Standard
42152 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42153 This is described in the
42155 Additional Features
42160 \begin_layout Subsection
42162 \begin_inset Index idx
42165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42174 \begin_layout Standard
42175 \begin_inset Graphics
42176 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42184 \begin_layout Standard
42185 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42191 \begin_layout Standard
42192 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42209 \begin_inset Note Note
42212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42213 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42218 manual for more information.
42226 \begin_layout Standard
42227 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42233 \begin_layout Standard
42234 \begin_inset Tabular
42235 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42236 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42237 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42238 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42244 \begin_inset Graphics
42245 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42259 pull-down box for the environments
42272 \begin_layout Standard
42273 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42279 \begin_layout Standard
42281 \begin_inset Tabular
42282 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
42283 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42284 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42285 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42309 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42339 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42369 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42385 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42399 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42406 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42415 arg "spelling-continuously"
42423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42427 Spellcheck continuously
42433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42486 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42516 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42546 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42576 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42592 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42606 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42632 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42646 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42674 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
42682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42689 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
42696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 Emphasize text, function of the
42718 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
42721 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42723 \begin_inset space ~
42726 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
42734 arg "dialog-show character"
42745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42766 Set text to noun style, function of the
42767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
42770 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42772 \begin_inset space ~
42775 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
42783 arg "dialog-show character"
42794 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42803 arg "textstyle-apply"
42811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42815 Format text using the current settings in the
42816 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758229
42819 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42824 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42826 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758229
42832 arg "dialog-show character"
42843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42867 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42869 \begin_inset space ~
42878 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42887 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
42895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42915 arg "tabular-insert"
42923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42945 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
42953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42957 Toggle outline window on/off,
42959 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42975 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
42983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42987 Toggle math toolbar on/off
42993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43002 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43014 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43027 \begin_layout Subsection
43029 \begin_inset Index idx
43032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43041 \begin_layout Standard
43042 \begin_inset Graphics
43043 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43051 \begin_layout Standard
43052 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43058 \begin_layout Standard
43059 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43063 \begin_layout Standard
43064 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43070 \begin_layout Standard
43071 \begin_inset Tabular
43072 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
43073 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43074 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43075 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43112 arg "layout Enumerate"
43120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43130 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43139 arg "layout Itemize"
43147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43193 arg "layout Description"
43201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43211 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43220 arg "depth-increment"
43228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43236 \begin_inset space ~
43240 \begin_inset space ~
43249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43258 arg "depth-decrement"
43266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43272 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43274 \begin_inset space ~
43278 \begin_inset space ~
43287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43296 arg "float-insert figure"
43304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43310 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43311 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43318 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43327 arg "float-insert table"
43335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43342 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43388 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43409 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43418 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43482 arg "nomencl-insert"
43490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43516 arg "footnote-insert"
43524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43546 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43562 \begin_inset space ~
43571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43595 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43615 arg "box-insert Frameless"
43623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43691 \begin_inset space ~
43700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43709 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
43717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43724 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43731 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43740 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
43748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43755 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43775 arg "dialog-show character"
43783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43789 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43794 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43810 arg "layout-paragraph"
43818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43824 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43844 arg "thesaurus-entry"
43852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43858 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43872 \begin_layout Subsection
43873 View/Update Toolbar
43874 \begin_inset Index idx
43877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43878 Toolbar ! View / Update
43886 \begin_layout Standard
43887 \begin_inset Graphics
43888 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
43895 \begin_layout Standard
43896 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43902 \begin_layout Standard
43903 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43907 \begin_layout Standard
43908 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43914 \begin_layout Standard
43915 \begin_inset Tabular
43916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
43917 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43918 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43919 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43959 arg "buffer-update"
43967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43989 arg "master-buffer-view"
43997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44005 \begin_inset space ~
44014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44023 arg "master-buffer-update"
44031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44061 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44075 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44076 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44077 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44078 Synchronize with Output
44084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44108 View (Other Formats)
44114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44121 arg "update-others"
44129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44136 Update (Other Formats)
44149 \begin_layout Standard
44150 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44154 \begin_layout Subsection
44158 \begin_layout Standard
44159 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44166 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44170 , the table toolbar
44171 \begin_inset Index idx
44174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44188 manual and the math macro toolbar
44189 \begin_inset Index idx
44192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44205 \begin_layout Chapter
44206 The Document Settings
44207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44209 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44214 \begin_inset Index idx
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 Document ! Settings
44226 \begin_layout Standard
44230 \begin_inset space ~
44235 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44236 is called with the menu
44238 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44242 You can save your document settings as default with the
44244 Save as Document Defaults
44246 button in any dialog.
44247 This will create a template named
44251 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44252 when you create a new document without
44256 \begin_layout Standard
44261 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44262 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44265 \begin_layout Standard
44266 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44267 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44268 to find the one you are looking for.
44269 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44270 the submenus of the dialog.
44272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44276 \begin_inset space \space{}
44280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44287 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44288 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44289 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44292 \begin_layout Section
44296 \begin_layout Standard
44297 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44299 Document classes are described in section
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44306 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44314 \begin_layout Standard
44318 \begin_inset space ~
44323 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44328 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44329 as a layout for a document class.
44330 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44332 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44341 \begin_layout Standard
44342 Some classes use special class options by default.
44343 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44347 and you can decide to use them or not.
44348 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44349 recommended you leave them untouched.
44354 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44355 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44360 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44362 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44368 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44369 \begin_inset Newline newline
44374 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44377 \begin_inset Newline newline
44380 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44381 distribution, see section
44386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44388 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44401 \begin_layout Standard
44406 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44407 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44408 in the background if the child document
44409 is opened without its master.
44410 This way child documents are always compilable.
44411 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44418 \begin_inset space ~
44426 \begin_layout Standard
44427 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44438 \begin_inset Index idx
44441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44443 packages ! prettyref
44449 \begin_inset Index idx
44452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44454 packages ! refstyle
44459 for cross-references, see section
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44466 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44473 \begin_layout Section
44477 \begin_layout Standard
44478 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44479 Please refer to the section
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44490 \begin_inset space ~
44495 manual for details.
44498 \begin_layout Section
44502 \begin_layout Standard
44503 Modules are explained in section
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44510 reference "subsec:Modules"
44517 \begin_layout Section
44521 \begin_layout Standard
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44529 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44536 \begin_layout Section
44540 \begin_layout Standard
44541 The document font settings are described in section
44542 \begin_inset space ~
44546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44548 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
44555 \begin_layout Section
44559 \begin_layout Standard
44560 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
44572 \begin_inset space ~
44577 and whether it should be a
44580 \begin_inset space ~
44585 can also be specified here.
44588 \begin_layout Standard
44589 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
44590 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
44591 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
44593 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
44596 \begin_layout Standard
44599 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
44602 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
44603 justifies the text on screen.
44604 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
44608 \begin_layout Section
44612 \begin_layout Standard
44613 This dialog is described in sections
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44620 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
44625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44627 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
44634 \begin_layout Section
44638 \begin_layout Standard
44639 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
44640 \begin_inset space ~
44644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44646 reference "subsec:Margins"
44653 \begin_layout Section
44655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44657 name "sec:Language-encodings"
44662 \begin_inset Index idx
44665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44666 Language ! Encoding
44674 \begin_layout Standard
44675 The document language and quote styles are set here.
44676 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44677 (the \SpecialChar LyX
44679 is always encoded in utf8).
44680 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
44681 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
44682 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
44683 -command is not known for
44684 a particular character).
44687 \begin_layout Standard
44688 If you use the option
44693 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
44694 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
44695 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44697 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
44698 exactly one encoding.
44699 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
44702 \begin_layout Standard
44704 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
44705 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
44706 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44707 installation supports Unicode), choose
44708 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
44709 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44710 is quite incomplete, so
44711 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
44716 (when \SpecialChar LyX
44717 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44718 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
44719 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44720 -commands is not used, because all
44721 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
44722 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44723 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44724 , two new alternative engines
44725 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44727 Both engines support Unicode natively.
44729 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
44732 \begin_inset space ~
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44748 \begin_inset space ~
44754 \begin_inset space ~
44758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44760 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
44765 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
44769 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
44772 \begin_layout Standard
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44781 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44782 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
44784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44792 The possible settings are:
44795 \begin_layout Description
44796 Default uses the language package that is selected in
44798 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44799 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44803 \begin_inset space ~
44807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44809 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44816 \begin_layout Description
44817 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
44818 format you will use.
44819 In many cases this will be
44824 \begin_inset Index idx
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44835 If the newer package
44840 \begin_inset Index idx
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44845 packages ! polyglossia
44850 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44851 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44852 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
44854 this package will be used instead of
44861 \begin_layout Description
44863 \begin_inset space ~
44874 would be more appropriate.
44877 \begin_layout Description
44878 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
44879 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
44883 (for German texts), type in
44886 \begin_inset Newline newline
44891 usepackage{ngerman}
44894 \begin_layout Description
44895 None will not use a language package.
44896 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
44899 \begin_layout Standard
44900 Here is a list with the important encodings:
44903 \begin_layout Description
44905 \begin_inset space ~
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44913 \begin_inset space ~
44920 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44926 \begin_inset Index idx
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44931 packages ! inputenc
44937 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
44938 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
44939 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
44943 \begin_layout Description
44944 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
44946 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
44947 commands, which may result in a big
44948 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44949 -commands are needed.
44952 \begin_layout Description
44954 \begin_inset space ~
44958 \begin_inset space ~
44961 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
44964 \begin_layout Description
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44973 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
44976 \begin_layout Description
44978 \begin_inset space ~
44981 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
44984 \begin_layout Description
44986 \begin_inset space ~
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44993 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
44994 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
44997 \begin_layout Description
44999 \begin_inset space ~
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45006 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45010 \begin_layout Description
45012 \begin_inset space ~
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45019 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45020 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45023 \begin_layout Description
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45029 \begin_inset space ~
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45036 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45043 \begin_layout Description
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45053 \begin_inset space ~
45056 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45057 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45060 \begin_layout Description
45062 \begin_inset space ~
45066 \begin_inset space ~
45069 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45070 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45071 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45072 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45073 \begin_inset space ~
45077 \begin_inset space ~
45083 \begin_layout Description
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45089 \begin_inset space ~
45092 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45093 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45094 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45096 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45097 \begin_inset space ~
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45107 \begin_layout Description
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45116 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45119 \begin_layout Description
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45125 \begin_inset space ~
45128 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45131 \begin_layout Description
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45140 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45143 \begin_layout Description
45145 \begin_inset space ~
45148 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45151 \begin_layout Description
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45156 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45159 \begin_layout Description
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45168 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45171 \begin_layout Description
45173 \begin_inset space ~
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45183 \begin_layout Description
45185 \begin_inset space ~
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45192 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45195 \begin_layout Description
45197 \begin_inset space ~
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45207 \begin_layout Description
45209 \begin_inset space ~
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45216 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45222 \begin_inset Index idx
45225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45232 , when using this, set the document language to
45237 \begin_layout Description
45239 \begin_inset space ~
45243 \begin_inset space ~
45246 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45251 , when using this, set the document language to
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45260 \begin_layout Description
45262 \begin_inset space ~
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45269 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45275 \begin_inset Index idx
45278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45280 packages ! japanese
45285 , when using this, set the document language to
45290 \begin_layout Description
45292 \begin_inset space ~
45296 \begin_inset space ~
45299 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45304 , when using this, set the document language to
45309 \begin_layout Description
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45318 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45323 , when using this, set the document language to
45328 \begin_layout Description
45330 \begin_inset space ~
45333 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45336 \begin_layout Description
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45342 \begin_inset space ~
45346 \begin_inset space ~
45349 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45352 \begin_layout Description
45354 \begin_inset space ~
45358 \begin_inset space ~
45362 \begin_inset space ~
45365 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45366 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45367 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45370 \begin_layout Description
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45376 \begin_inset space ~
45382 \begin_layout Description
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45388 \begin_inset space ~
45391 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45392 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45395 \begin_layout Description
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45401 \begin_inset space ~
45404 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45410 \begin_inset Index idx
45413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45420 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45423 \begin_layout Description
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45433 \begin_inset space ~
45436 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45443 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45446 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45453 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45454 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45456 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45459 \begin_layout Description
45461 \begin_inset space ~
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45468 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45474 \begin_inset Index idx
45477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45484 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45487 \begin_layout Description
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45492 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45498 \begin_inset Index idx
45501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45503 packages ! inputenc
45509 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45513 \begin_layout Description
45515 \begin_inset space ~
45519 \begin_inset space ~
45523 \begin_inset space ~
45526 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45527 \begin_inset space ~
45533 \begin_layout Description
45535 \begin_inset space ~
45539 \begin_inset space ~
45543 \begin_inset space ~
45546 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
45547 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
45548 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
45552 \begin_layout Description
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45562 \begin_inset space ~
45565 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
45566 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
45569 \begin_layout Section
45571 \begin_inset Index idx
45574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 \begin_inset Index idx
45584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45591 \begin_inset Index idx
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45595 Color ! Shaded boxes
45601 \begin_inset Index idx
45604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45605 Color ! Greyed-out notes
45613 \begin_layout Standard
45614 Here you can alter the font color for the
45618 (default: black), for
45621 \begin_inset space ~
45626 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
45630 (default: white) and for
45633 \begin_inset space ~
45643 sets the color back to the default.
45646 \begin_layout Standard
45647 Clicking any button showing
45655 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
45656 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
45657 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
45658 later more quickly.
45661 \begin_layout Standard
45662 Note, if you change the
45665 \begin_inset space ~
45670 font color and use the option
45673 \begin_inset space ~
45678 in the document settings under
45681 \begin_inset space ~
45686 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45693 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45700 \begin_layout Standard
45701 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
45707 \begin_layout Standard
45711 \begin_inset space ~
45720 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
45723 \begin_inset space ~
45726 Code after a forced page break:
45729 \begin_layout Itemize
45730 For the page color:
45731 \begin_inset Newline newline
45738 pagecolor{color name}
45741 \begin_layout Itemize
45742 For the text color:
45743 \begin_inset Newline newline
45753 \begin_layout Standard
45754 You are restricted to one of
45790 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
45797 \begin_inset space ~
45803 \begin_inset Newline newline
45806 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
45807 names to refer to them:
45810 \begin_layout Itemize
45816 \begin_inset Newline newline
45821 page_backgroundcolor
45824 \begin_layout Itemize
45828 \begin_inset space ~
45834 \begin_inset Newline newline
45842 \begin_layout Itemize
45846 \begin_inset space ~
45852 \begin_inset Newline newline
45860 \begin_layout Itemize
45864 \begin_inset space ~
45870 \begin_inset Newline newline
45878 \begin_layout Standard
45879 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
45882 \begin_inset space ~
45890 \begin_inset space ~
45898 \begin_layout Section
45902 \begin_layout Standard
45903 Here you can adjust the
45907 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
45911 as described in section
45912 \begin_inset space ~
45916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45918 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
45925 \begin_layout Section
45929 \begin_layout Standard
45930 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45936 \begin_inset Index idx
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45941 packages ! biblatex
45951 \begin_inset Index idx
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45966 \begin_inset Index idx
45969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45980 Sectioned bibliography
45982 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45988 \begin_inset Index idx
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45993 packages ! bibtopic
46003 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46004 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46008 for the generation of the bibliography.
46009 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46010 \begin_inset space ~
46014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46016 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46023 \begin_layout Section
46027 \begin_layout Standard
46028 Here you can define the
46032 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46034 \begin_inset space ~
46038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46040 reference "sec:Index"
46047 \begin_layout Section
46051 \begin_layout Standard
46052 The PDF properties are explained in section
46053 \begin_inset space ~
46057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46059 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46066 \begin_layout Section
46070 \begin_layout Standard
46071 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
46072 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46078 \begin_inset Index idx
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46093 \begin_inset Index idx
46096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46108 \begin_inset Index idx
46111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46123 \begin_inset Index idx
46126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46138 \begin_inset Index idx
46141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46143 packages ! mathdots
46153 \begin_inset Index idx
46156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46158 packages ! mathtools
46168 \begin_inset Index idx
46171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 \begin_inset Index idx
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46188 packages ! stackrel
46198 \begin_inset Index idx
46201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 packages ! stmaryrd
46213 \begin_inset Index idx
46216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46218 packages ! undertilde
46223 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46226 \begin_layout Description
46227 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46228 -errors in formulas,
46229 ensure that you have this enabled.
46232 \begin_layout Description
46233 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46234 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46235 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46239 \begin_layout Description
46240 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46243 \begin_inset space ~
46255 \begin_layout Description
46256 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46259 \begin_inset space ~
46271 \begin_layout Description
46272 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46283 \begin_layout Description
46284 mathtools is used for the math commands
46320 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46327 \begin_layout Description
46328 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46330 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46339 \begin_layout Description
46340 stackrel is used for the math command
46357 \begin_layout Description
46358 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46361 \begin_layout Description
46362 undertilde is used for the math command
46370 Accents for one Character
46379 \begin_layout Section
46381 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
46383 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
46389 \begin_layout Standard
46391 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
46392 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
46395 \begin_layout Standard
46397 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
46398 The float placement options
46399 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
46402 are described in the section
46405 \begin_inset space ~
46409 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
46411 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
46419 \begin_inset space ~
46427 \begin_layout Section
46431 \begin_layout Standard
46432 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46434 Program Code Listings
46439 \begin_inset space ~
46447 \begin_layout Section
46451 \begin_layout Standard
46452 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46460 set to be used and set the
46465 The itemize environment is described in section
46466 \begin_inset space ~
46470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46472 reference "sec:Itemize"
46479 \begin_layout Standard
46480 You can furthermore specify a
46483 \begin_inset space ~
46488 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46489 command of the desired character.
46490 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46497 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46503 \begin_inset space \space{}
46507 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46517 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46518 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46521 \begin_layout Standard
46522 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46530 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46531 -packages in the preamble (menu
46534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46535 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46538 \begin_inset space ~
46544 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
46548 usepackage{textcomp}
46551 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
46555 usepackage{amssymb}
46565 \begin_layout Section
46569 \begin_layout Standard
46570 Branches are described in section
46571 \begin_inset space ~
46575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46577 reference "sec:Branches"
46584 \begin_layout Section
46586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46588 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
46595 \begin_layout Standard
46596 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
46599 \begin_layout Description
46601 \begin_inset space ~
46605 \begin_inset space ~
46608 Format: The format that is used when you enter
46609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46628 View Master Document
46629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46636 Update Master Document
46637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46644 menu or the toolbar.
46645 The default is set in
46647 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46648 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46650 \begin_inset space ~
46653 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46657 \begin_inset space ~
46661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46663 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46670 \begin_layout Description
46672 \begin_inset space ~
46676 \begin_inset space ~
46679 Output settings for the menu
46681 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46683 \begin_inset space ~
46689 For a detailed description see section
46691 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46696 \begin_inset space ~
46704 \begin_layout Description
46706 \begin_inset space ~
46710 \begin_inset space ~
46713 Options offers settings for the export format
46721 \begin_inset space ~
46726 will assure that the output follows exactly version
46727 \begin_inset space ~
46730 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
46734 \begin_inset space ~
46739 settings are described in detail in section
46741 Math Output in XHTML
46746 \begin_inset space ~
46755 \begin_inset space ~
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46764 is used for the size of equations in the output.
46767 \begin_layout Description
46769 \begin_inset space ~
46774 Save transient properties
46776 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
46777 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
46778 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
46782 \begin_layout Itemize
46783 the activation of change tracking
46786 \begin_layout Itemize
46787 the output of tracked changes
46790 \begin_layout Itemize
46791 the recording of the document directory path.
46794 \begin_layout Standard
46795 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
46796 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
46800 \begin_layout Section
46808 \begin_layout Standard
46809 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46811 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
46813 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46815 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
46819 \begin_layout Standard
46820 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46821 -syntax is given in section
46822 \begin_inset space ~
46826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46828 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
46835 \begin_layout Chapter
46841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46843 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
46848 \begin_inset Index idx
46851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46860 \begin_layout Standard
46861 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
46863 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46867 It has the following submenus.
46870 \begin_layout Section
46874 \begin_layout Subsection
46878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46879 User Interface File
46880 \begin_inset Index idx
46883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46884 Customization ! of toolbars
46890 \begin_inset Index idx
46893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46894 Customization ! of menus
46902 \begin_layout Standard
46903 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
46904 interface (ui) file.
46905 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
46913 \begin_layout Description
46918 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
46921 \begin_layout Description
46928 the menu entries in popup context menus
46931 \begin_layout Description
46936 specifies the toolbar buttons
46939 \begin_layout Standard
46940 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
46941 and edit the entries.
46944 \begin_layout Standard
46945 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
46957 entries must be finished with an explicit
46982 and in the case of the
46983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46995 The syntax for the entries is:
46998 \begin_layout Standard
46999 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47028 \begin_layout Standard
47030 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47033 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47034 -functions are listed in the menu
47036 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47038 \begin_inset space ~
47046 \begin_layout Standard
47047 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47053 \begin_layout Standard
47054 For example, assuming you use the menu
47056 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47059 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
47063 \begin_layout Standard
47064 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47088 \begin_layout Standard
47090 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47105 to have the sixth bookmark.
47108 \begin_layout Standard
47112 \begin_inset space ~
47117 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
47118 's toolbar buttons.
47119 The currently available icon sets are compared in
47120 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47123 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
47131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47135 \begin_layout Standard
47138 Enable tool tips in main work area
47140 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47148 \begin_layout Standard
47153 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47154 should display in the menu
47156 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47158 \begin_inset space ~
47166 \begin_layout Subsection
47170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47174 \begin_layout Standard
47177 Restore window layouts and geometries
47180 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47181 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47185 \begin_layout Standard
47188 Restore cursor positions
47190 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47194 \begin_layout Standard
47197 Load opened files from last session
47199 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47203 \begin_layout Standard
47206 Clear all session information
47208 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47209 sessions (cursor positions, names
47210 of last opened documents, etc.).
47213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47217 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47222 \begin_inset Index idx
47225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47234 \begin_layout Standard
47237 Backup original documents when saving
47239 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47240 it was saved the last time.
47241 It is stored in the
47244 \begin_inset space ~
47250 \begin_inset space ~
47254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47256 reference "sec:Paths"
47260 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47263 \begin_inset space ~
47269 The backup file has the file extension
47270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47284 \begin_layout Standard
47287 Backup documents, every
47289 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47292 \begin_layout Standard
47295 Save documents compressed by default
47297 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47298 \begin_inset space ~
47302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47304 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47309 This applies to newly created documents only.
47310 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47314 Windows & work area
47317 \begin_layout Standard
47320 Open documents in tabs
47322 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47326 \begin_layout Standard
47331 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47338 \begin_inset space ~
47342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47344 reference "sec:Paths"
47348 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47355 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47356 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47357 of \SpecialChar LyX
47359 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47360 instance is created for each file.
47363 \begin_layout Standard
47366 Single close-tab button
47368 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47378 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47379 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47380 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47384 \begin_layout Standard
47385 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47393 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47394 before the change takes effect.
47402 \begin_layout Standard
47407 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47409 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47411 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47415 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47416 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47417 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47420 \begin_layout Subsection
47422 \begin_inset Index idx
47425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47434 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47441 \begin_layout Standard
47442 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47446 \begin_layout Standard
47447 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47455 This section only deals with the fonts
47459 the \SpecialChar LyX
47461 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47465 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47476 \begin_layout Standard
47477 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47494 (depends on the system) as its
47497 \begin_inset space ~
47513 \begin_layout Standard
47514 You can change the font size with the
47521 \begin_layout Standard
47526 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47531 points have the size of 1
47532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47536 \begin_inset space ~
47540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47542 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
47547 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
47548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47552 The sizes are explained in detail in section
47553 \begin_inset space ~
47557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47559 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
47566 \begin_layout Subsection
47568 \begin_inset Index idx
47571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47572 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
47579 \begin_inset Index idx
47582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47591 \begin_layout Standard
47592 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
47593 by choosing an item in the
47594 list and selecting the
47601 \begin_layout Standard
47602 By checking the option
47606 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
47609 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
47610 \begin_inset space ~
47614 \begin_inset space ~
47619 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
47622 \begin_layout Subsection
47624 \begin_inset Index idx
47627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47636 \begin_layout Standard
47637 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
47641 \begin_layout Standard
47646 enables previewing snippets of your document.
47647 This feature is described in section
47648 \begin_inset space ~
47652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47654 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47661 \begin_layout Standard
47662 Checking the option
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47669 \begin_inset space ~
47673 \begin_inset space ~
47678 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
47681 \begin_layout Section
47683 \begin_inset Index idx
47686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47695 \begin_layout Subsection
47699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47703 \begin_layout Standard
47706 Cursor follows scrollbar
47708 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
47712 \begin_layout Standard
47713 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
47714 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
47715 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
47718 \begin_layout Standard
47721 Scroll below end of document
47723 is self-explanatory.
47726 \begin_layout Standard
47727 In \SpecialChar LyX
47728 one can jump from word to word by pressing
47735 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
47737 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
47738 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
47741 \begin_layout Standard
47744 Sort environments alphabetically
47746 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47749 \begin_layout Standard
47752 Group environments by their category
47754 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47757 \begin_layout Standard
47762 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
47773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47777 \begin_layout Standard
47778 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
47783 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
47784 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
47788 \begin_layout Subsection
47790 \begin_inset Index idx
47793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47800 \begin_inset Index idx
47803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47804 Settings ! Shortcuts
47812 \begin_layout Standard
47817 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
47819 Several binding files are available, among them:
47822 \begin_layout Description
47823 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
47826 \begin_layout Description
47827 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
47839 \begin_layout Description
47840 mac.bind a set of bindings for
47843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47851 \begin_layout Standard
47852 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
47857 , and binding files for special languages.
47858 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
47859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47863 \begin_inset space \space{}
47867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47875 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
47876 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
47877 will try to use the appropriate binding
47881 \begin_layout Standard
47882 Some binding files, like
47886 , only have a limited scope.
47887 When looking at the end of the file
47891 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
47894 \begin_layout Standard
47898 \begin_inset space ~
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47907 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
47908 in the selected key binding file.
47911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47915 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
47920 \begin_inset Index idx
47923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47924 Key Bindings ! Editing
47932 \begin_layout Standard
47933 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
47934 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
47935 functions and the bound shortcuts.
47936 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
47939 Show key-bindings containing
47942 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
47943 Insert there for example as keyword
47944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47951 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
47952 functions that contain
47953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47961 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
47962 All \SpecialChar LyX
47963 functions are also listed in the file
47968 that you will find in the
47975 \begin_layout Standard
47976 For example, to add the shortcut
47984 , select the function and press the
47989 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
47990 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
47993 \begin_layout Standard
47994 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
47995 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
47997 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
47998 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48000 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48005 \begin_layout Standard
48006 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48009 \begin_layout Standard
48010 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48012 The syntax of the entries is:
48015 \begin_layout Standard
48021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48040 \begin_layout Standard
48041 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48042 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48070 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
48071 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
48072 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
48073 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
48075 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
48079 , you needed to specify it as
48084 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
48087 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
48090 \begin_layout Subsection
48092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48094 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
48099 \begin_inset Index idx
48102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48109 \begin_inset Index idx
48112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48113 Settings ! Keyboard Map
48121 \begin_layout Standard
48122 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
48123 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
48124 provides keyboard maps.
48125 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
48126 is a Romanian one, you can enable
48129 \begin_inset space ~
48133 \begin_inset space ~
48138 and select the keyboard map file named
48145 \begin_layout Standard
48154 keyboard map and, if you use the
48158 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48161 arg "keymap-primary"
48167 arg "keymap-secondary"
48170 respectively or toggle between them with
48173 arg "keymap-toggle"
48179 \begin_layout Standard
48180 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48188 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48197 \begin_layout Standard
48198 You can also specify the mouse
48200 Wheel scrolling speed
48203 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48207 Middle mouse button pasting
48209 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48210 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48213 \begin_layout Standard
48221 \begin_inset space ~
48225 \begin_inset space ~
48230 you can select a key for zooming.
48231 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48234 \begin_layout Subsection
48238 \begin_layout Standard
48239 Input completion is described in section
48240 \begin_inset space ~
48244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48246 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48253 \begin_layout Section
48255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48262 \begin_inset Index idx
48265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48272 \begin_inset Index idx
48275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48284 \begin_layout Standard
48285 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48286 are normally determined during
48288 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48291 \begin_layout Description
48293 \begin_inset space ~
48296 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48297 's working directory.
48298 It is the default when you
48309 \begin_inset space ~
48317 \begin_layout Description
48319 \begin_inset space ~
48322 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
48324 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48326 \begin_inset space ~
48330 \begin_inset space ~
48338 \begin_layout Description
48340 \begin_inset space ~
48343 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
48349 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48353 \begin_inset Newline newline
48357 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48369 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48370 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48378 \begin_layout Description
48380 \begin_inset space ~
48384 \begin_inset Index idx
48387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48393 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48394 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48395 \begin_inset space ~
48399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48401 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48409 will be used to save the backups.
48410 \begin_inset Newline newline
48413 Backup files have the ending
48414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48424 \begin_layout Description
48426 \begin_inset space ~
48429 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48430 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48432 \begin_inset Newline newline
48439 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48445 You can edit this file with the program
48454 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48455 in its preferences under
48458 \begin_inset space ~
48464 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48469 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48471 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48472 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48478 and \SpecialChar LyX
48479 need to be running the same time.
48480 \begin_inset Newline newline
48483 The pipe is also used for the
48487 feature, see section
48488 \begin_inset space ~
48492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48494 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48499 \begin_inset Newline newline
48502 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48503 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48504 \begin_inset Newline newline
48520 \begin_layout Description
48522 \begin_inset space ~
48525 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
48528 \begin_layout Description
48530 \begin_inset space ~
48533 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
48534 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
48535 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
48538 \begin_layout Description
48540 \begin_inset space ~
48543 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
48549 You only need to specify it if you are using
48553 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
48555 For \SpecialChar LyX
48560 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
48564 \begin_layout Description
48566 \begin_inset space ~
48569 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
48570 When \SpecialChar LyX
48571 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
48572 to find it on the system.
48573 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
48575 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
48577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48584 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
48585 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
48588 \begin_layout Description
48590 \begin_inset space ~
48593 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
48594 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
48595 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
48596 code or in the document
48598 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
48600 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
48601 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
48602 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
48603 scanned for the input files.
48604 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
48605 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
48607 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
48608 compilation may fail for some documents.
48611 \begin_layout Section
48615 \begin_layout Standard
48616 Here you can insert your
48625 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
48627 \begin_inset space ~
48631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48633 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48637 , to mark changes you make as yours.
48640 \begin_layout Section
48642 \begin_inset Index idx
48645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48646 Language ! Settings
48652 \begin_inset Index idx
48655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48656 Settings ! Language
48664 \begin_layout Subsection
48666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48668 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48675 \begin_layout Description
48677 \begin_inset space ~
48681 \begin_inset space ~
48684 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
48686 You can find its actual translation status here:
48687 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48689 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
48697 \begin_layout Description
48699 \begin_inset space ~
48702 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
48703 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
48704 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
48705 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
48706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48722 The most widespread language package is
48727 \begin_inset Index idx
48730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48737 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
48739 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48740 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48741 come with the alternative
48747 \begin_inset Index idx
48750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48752 packages ! polyglossia
48757 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
48758 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
48764 The available selections are described in section
48765 \begin_inset space ~
48769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48771 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
48778 \begin_layout Description
48780 \begin_inset space ~
48783 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48784 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
48785 you can here specify the command to start the package.
48786 An example is the start command
48792 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
48794 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
48798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48814 selectlanguage{$$lang}
48819 \begin_layout Description
48821 \begin_inset space ~
48829 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
48830 command toggles the package on and off.
48833 \begin_layout Description
48835 \begin_inset space ~
48839 \begin_inset space ~
48842 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
48846 \begin_layout Description
48848 \begin_inset space ~
48852 \begin_inset space ~
48855 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
48859 \begin_layout Description
48861 \begin_inset space ~
48865 \begin_inset space ~
48868 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
48869 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
48870 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
48872 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
48879 \begin_layout Description
48881 \begin_inset space ~
48884 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
48886 When this option is not set, the
48889 \begin_inset space ~
48894 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48896 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
48899 \begin_inset space ~
48907 \begin_layout Description
48909 \begin_inset space ~
48915 \begin_inset space ~
48921 When it is not set, the
48924 \begin_inset space ~
48929 is set to the end of the document.
48932 \begin_layout Description
48934 \begin_inset space ~
48938 \begin_inset space ~
48941 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
48942 language will be underlined in blue.
48945 \begin_layout Description
48947 \begin_inset space ~
48951 \begin_inset space ~
48954 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
48955 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
48958 \begin_layout Description
48960 \begin_inset space ~
48963 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
48964 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
48965 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
48966 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
48969 \begin_layout Subsection
48973 \begin_layout Standard
48974 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
48975 \begin_inset space ~
48979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48981 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
48988 \begin_layout Section
48992 \begin_layout Subsection
48994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48996 name "subsec:General-output"
49003 \begin_layout Description
49005 \begin_inset space ~
49008 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49010 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49012 \begin_inset space ~
49018 For a detailed description see section
49020 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49025 \begin_inset space ~
49033 \begin_layout Description
49035 \begin_inset space ~
49038 Options Options for the program
49042 that is used for the export format
49047 \begin_inset space ~
49051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49053 reference "subsec:Export"
49058 Possible options are listed in the
49063 \begin_inset Newline newline
49067 \begin_inset Flex URL
49070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49072 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
49082 \begin_layout Description
49084 \begin_inset space ~
49088 \begin_inset space ~
49091 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
49094 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49095 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
49097 \begin_inset space ~
49103 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
49106 \begin_layout Description
49108 \begin_inset space ~
49112 \begin_inset Index idx
49115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49122 \begin_inset Index idx
49125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49126 Settings ! Date format
49131 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
49132 \begin_inset Newline newline
49136 \begin_inset Flex URL
49139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49141 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49147 \begin_inset Newline newline
49150 For example the format
49151 \begin_inset Newline newline
49155 \begin_inset Newline newline
49158 prints the date as day/month/year.
49161 \begin_layout Description
49163 \begin_inset space ~
49167 \begin_inset space ~
49170 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49171 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49174 \begin_layout Subsection
49180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49182 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49187 \begin_inset Index idx
49190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49191 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49200 \begin_layout Description
49202 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49204 \begin_inset space ~
49212 \begin_inset space ~
49216 \begin_inset space ~
49219 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49224 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49245 are used for Cyrillic.
49246 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49259 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49261 sets up in the background.
49262 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49267 \begin_layout Description
49269 \begin_inset space ~
49273 \begin_inset space ~
49277 \begin_inset space ~
49281 \begin_inset space ~
49284 options They only have an effect when the program
49288 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49291 \begin_layout Standard
49292 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49293 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49294 manuals of the applications.
49297 \begin_layout Description
49299 \begin_inset space ~
49302 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49303 \begin_inset space ~
49307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49309 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49316 \begin_layout Description
49318 \begin_inset space ~
49321 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49322 \begin_inset space ~
49326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49328 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49335 \begin_layout Description
49337 \begin_inset space ~
49340 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49341 \begin_inset space ~
49345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49347 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49354 \begin_layout Description
49360 \begin_inset space ~
49363 command Command for the program
49365 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49368 that is described in the section
49370 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49375 Additional Features
49380 \begin_layout Standard
49381 There are additionally the following options:
49384 \begin_layout Description
49386 \begin_inset space ~
49390 \begin_inset space ~
49394 \begin_inset space ~
49398 \begin_inset space ~
49403 \begin_inset space ~
49406 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49424 to separate folders.
49425 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49427 \begin_inset Index idx
49430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49437 \begin_inset Index idx
49440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49449 \begin_layout Description
49451 \begin_inset space ~
49455 \begin_inset space ~
49459 \begin_inset space ~
49463 \begin_inset space ~
49467 \begin_inset space ~
49471 \begin_inset space ~
49474 changes Removes all manually set
49480 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49481 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49483 \begin_inset space ~
49488 dialog when changing the document class.
49491 \begin_layout Section
49493 \begin_inset space ~
49497 \begin_inset Index idx
49500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49509 \begin_layout Subsection
49511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49513 name "subsec:Converters"
49518 \begin_inset Index idx
49521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49530 \begin_layout Standard
49531 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
49532 from one format to another.
49533 You can modify converters or create new ones.
49534 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
49541 \begin_inset space ~
49546 field and press the
49551 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
49555 \begin_inset space ~
49560 drop-down list, modify the
49564 field and press the
49571 \begin_layout Standard
49574 Converter File Cache
49580 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
49582 Maximum Age (in days
49585 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
49586 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
49589 \begin_layout Standard
49590 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
49591 definition, is described in the section
49602 \begin_layout Subsection
49604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49606 name "sec:File-Formats"
49611 \begin_inset Index idx
49614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49621 \begin_inset Index idx
49624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49633 \begin_layout Standard
49634 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
49644 programs that should be used for certain formats.
49647 \begin_layout Standard
49648 You can also define the
49650 Default output format
49652 that is used when you use
49654 View, Update, View Master Document
49658 Update Master Document
49664 menu or the toolbar.
49667 \begin_layout Standard
49668 More about formats and their options is described in the section
49679 \begin_layout Standard
49680 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
49682 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
49683 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
49684 This is done by specifying a
49689 More about this is described in the section
49700 \begin_layout Chapter
49701 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49703 \begin_inset Index idx
49706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49715 name "chap:Units-available-in"
49722 \begin_layout Standard
49724 \begin_inset space ~
49728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49730 reference "tab:Units"
49734 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49735 and used in this documentation.
49738 \begin_layout Standard
49739 \begin_inset Float table
49745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49746 \begin_inset Caption Standard
49748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49764 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49772 \begin_inset Tabular
49773 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
49774 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
49775 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49776 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
49777 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49930 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
49934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50201 scaled point (65536
50202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50269 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50393 % of original image width
50398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50482 \begin_layout Standard
50483 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50486 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50493 \begin_layout Bibliography
50494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50495 LatexCommand bibitem
50502 The \SpecialChar LyX
50504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50507 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
50513 \begin_inset Newline newline
50517 \begin_inset Flex URL
50520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50522 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
50530 \begin_layout Bibliography
50531 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50532 LatexCommand bibitem
50533 key "latexcompanion"
50538 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
50540 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50541 Companion Second Edition.
50544 Addison-Wesley, 2004
50547 \begin_layout Bibliography
50548 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50549 LatexCommand bibitem
50555 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
50558 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50562 Addison-Wesley, 2003
50565 \begin_layout Bibliography
50566 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50567 LatexCommand bibitem
50576 : A Document Preparation System.
50579 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
50582 \begin_layout Bibliography
50583 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50584 LatexCommand bibitem
50594 The \SpecialChar TeX
50598 Addison-Wesley, 1984
50601 \begin_layout Bibliography
50602 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50603 LatexCommand bibitem
50609 The \SpecialChar TeX
50611 \begin_inset Newline newline
50615 \begin_inset Flex URL
50618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50620 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
50628 \begin_layout Bibliography
50629 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50630 LatexCommand bibitem
50636 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50638 \begin_inset Newline newline
50642 \begin_inset Flex URL
50645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50647 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
50655 \begin_layout Bibliography
50656 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50657 LatexCommand bibitem
50664 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50666 name "Documentation"
50667 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
50674 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50678 \begin_inset Newline newline
50682 \begin_inset Flex URL
50685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50687 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
50695 \begin_layout Bibliography
50696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50697 LatexCommand bibitem
50704 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50706 name "Documentation"
50707 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
50712 how to use the program
50714 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50718 \begin_inset Newline newline
50722 \begin_inset Flex URL
50725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50727 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
50735 \begin_layout Bibliography
50736 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50737 LatexCommand bibitem
50744 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50746 name "Documentation"
50747 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
50752 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50758 \begin_inset Index idx
50761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50763 packages ! biblatex
50769 \begin_inset Newline newline
50773 \begin_inset Flex URL
50776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50778 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
50786 \begin_layout Bibliography
50787 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50788 LatexCommand bibitem
50795 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50797 name "Documentation"
50798 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
50803 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50809 \begin_inset Index idx
50812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50820 \begin_inset Newline newline
50824 \begin_inset Flex URL
50827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50829 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
50837 \begin_layout Bibliography
50838 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50839 LatexCommand bibitem
50846 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50848 name "Documentation"
50849 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
50859 \begin_inset Newline newline
50863 \begin_inset Flex URL
50866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50868 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
50876 \begin_layout Bibliography
50877 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50878 LatexCommand bibitem
50879 key "makeindex-man"
50885 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50888 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
50898 \begin_inset Newline newline
50902 \begin_inset Flex URL
50905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50907 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
50915 \begin_layout Bibliography
50916 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50917 LatexCommand bibitem
50924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50926 name "Documentation"
50927 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
50937 \begin_inset Newline newline
50941 \begin_inset Flex URL
50944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50946 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
50954 \begin_layout Bibliography
50955 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50956 LatexCommand bibitem
50963 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50965 name "Documentation"
50966 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
50971 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
50973 \begin_inset Newline newline
50977 \begin_inset Flex URL
50980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50982 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
50990 \begin_layout Bibliography
50991 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50992 LatexCommand bibitem
50999 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51001 name "Documentation"
51002 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51007 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51013 \begin_inset Index idx
51016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51024 \begin_inset Newline newline
51028 \begin_inset Flex URL
51031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51033 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
51041 \begin_layout Bibliography
51042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51043 LatexCommand bibitem
51050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51052 name "Documentation"
51053 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
51058 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51064 \begin_inset Index idx
51067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51069 packages ! enumitem
51075 \begin_inset Newline newline
51079 \begin_inset Flex URL
51082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51084 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
51092 \begin_layout Bibliography
51093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51094 LatexCommand bibitem
51101 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51103 name "Documentation"
51104 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
51109 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51115 \begin_inset Index idx
51118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51120 packages ! fancyhdr
51126 \begin_inset Newline newline
51130 \begin_inset Flex URL
51133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51135 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51143 \begin_layout Bibliography
51144 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51145 LatexCommand bibitem
51152 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51154 name "Documentation"
51155 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51160 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51166 \begin_inset Index idx
51169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51171 packages ! hyperref
51177 \begin_inset Newline newline
51181 \begin_inset Flex URL
51184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51186 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51194 \begin_layout Bibliography
51195 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51196 LatexCommand bibitem
51203 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51205 name "Documentation"
51206 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51211 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51217 \begin_inset Index idx
51220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51222 packages ! microtpye
51228 \begin_inset Newline newline
51232 \begin_inset Flex URL
51235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51237 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51245 \begin_layout Bibliography
51246 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51247 LatexCommand bibitem
51254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51256 name "Documentation"
51257 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51262 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51268 \begin_inset Index idx
51271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51279 \begin_inset Newline newline
51283 \begin_inset Flex URL
51286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51288 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51296 \begin_layout Bibliography
51297 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51298 LatexCommand bibitem
51305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51307 name "Documentation"
51308 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51313 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51319 \begin_inset Index idx
51322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51324 packages ! prettyref
51330 \begin_inset Newline newline
51334 \begin_inset Flex URL
51337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51339 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51347 \begin_layout Bibliography
51348 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51349 LatexCommand bibitem
51356 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51358 name "Documentation"
51359 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51364 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51370 \begin_inset Index idx
51373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51375 packages ! refstyle
51381 \begin_inset Newline newline
51385 \begin_inset Flex URL
51388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51390 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51398 \begin_layout Bibliography
51399 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51400 LatexCommand bibitem
51407 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51410 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51415 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51417 \begin_inset Newline newline
51421 \begin_inset Flex URL
51424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51426 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51434 \begin_layout Bibliography
51435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51436 LatexCommand bibitem
51443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51446 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51451 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51453 \begin_inset Newline newline
51457 \begin_inset Flex URL
51460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51462 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51470 \begin_layout Bibliography
51471 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51472 LatexCommand bibitem
51479 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51482 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51487 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51488 for Cyrillic languages:
51489 \begin_inset Newline newline
51493 \begin_inset Flex URL
51496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51498 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51506 \begin_layout Bibliography
51507 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51508 LatexCommand bibitem
51515 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51518 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
51523 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51525 \begin_inset Newline newline
51529 \begin_inset Flex URL
51532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51534 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
51542 \begin_layout Bibliography
51543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51544 LatexCommand bibitem
51551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51554 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
51559 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51561 \begin_inset Newline newline
51565 \begin_inset Flex URL
51568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51570 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
51578 \begin_layout Bibliography
51579 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51580 LatexCommand bibitem
51587 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51590 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
51595 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51597 \begin_inset Newline newline
51601 \begin_inset Flex URL
51604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51606 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
51614 \begin_layout Standard
51615 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51649 \begin_inset Note Note
51652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51659 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
51660 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
51661 bibliography is the second one:
51669 \begin_layout Standard
51670 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
51671 LatexCommand bibtex
51672 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
51673 options "biblio/alphadin"
51680 \begin_layout Standard
51681 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51685 \begin_layout Standard
51689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51695 pagedeclaration}[1]{
51698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51704 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
51712 \begin_inset Note Note
51715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51716 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
51717 \begin_inset space ~
51721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51723 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
51735 \begin_layout Standard
51736 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
51737 LatexCommand printnomenclature
51743 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
51744 LatexCommand printindex